JP7219470B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

According to the present invention, a game is executed in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of game execution conditions, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state can be generated in which game value is awarded to the player. Regarding gaming machines.

A conventional gaming machine preferentially executes a second special figure variation display game over a first special figure variation display game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-099315 A

By the way, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed simultaneously, a problem may occur.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to prevent problems from occurring when performing simultaneous fluctuations.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A game control means capable of executing a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a game execution condition, and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In a game machine equipped with
Provided with a production control means for controlling the production based on the command from the game control means,
The game includes a first game that is executed based on the establishment of a first game execution condition and a second game that is executed based on the establishment of a second game execution condition,
The special results include a first special result capable of generating a first special game state and a second special game state capable of generating a second special game state having a lower game value than the first special game state. with special results,
The game control means is
Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the first game and the second game;
a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state,
The concurrent execution means
forcibly stopping the second game with a result other than the special result based on the fact that the first game is stopped with the first special result during execution of the second game;
forcibly stopping the first game with a result other than the special result based on the second game stopping with the first special result during execution of the first game;
The first game is interrupted based on the second game stopping with the second special result during execution of the first game , and after the second special game state based on the second special result ends, restarting the first game, and at the end of the variable time of the first game, stopping the first game with the outcome determined at the start of the first game;
During the suspension of the first game, the measurement of the variable time of the first game is suspended, and the variable display of the identification information of the first game is continued;
determining, in the normal game state, a variation mode including the variation time of the first game without referring to variation mode information including the variation time of the second game;
The production control means is
Regarding the type of effect executed in the first game in the normal game state , the variation mode of the first game, whether or not the second game as the first special result is being executed , and the first game and the remaining variation time of the second game at the start of the second game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring when performing simultaneous variation.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a prize-winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a batch display. It is a figure explaining the detail of an information display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of the production|presentation operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining a hit probability and a hit kind. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining the process during the small hit fanfare, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process during the small hit. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. (a) is a flow chart for explaining small hit remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining small hit end processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flow chart explaining general electric winning a prize switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a normal figure hit. It is a flowchart explaining normal electric operation transition setting processing. (a) is a flowchart for explaining the normal pattern per end process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the general pattern normal process transition setting process 2. FIG. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; It is a flow chart explaining production button input processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining scenario setting processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining notice setting processing during a small hit. It is a figure explaining the content of the preliminary announcement during a small hit. It is a figure explaining the display in a specific game state. It is a diagram for explaining the operation of the special variable winning device in the small winning game state. It is a figure explaining an example of a preliminary announcement during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of increase promotion alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of a preliminary announcement during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of a preliminary announcement during a small hit. It is a figure explaining an example of a preliminary announcement during a small hit. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an arrangement example of a sub display device; It is a figure explaining an example of a screenshot function. It is a figure explaining a player setting mode. It is a figure explaining hole setting mode. 10 is a flowchart for explaining screenshot processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hole/player setting mode processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hall demonstration effect setting processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining player volume adjustment processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a player's LED brightness adjustment process. 9 is a flowchart for explaining screen shot setting processing; It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an information display apparatus. It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing pattern of a special variable prize-winning device. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing pattern of a special variable prize-winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining checksum calculation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining initial value random number update processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining input processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining switch read processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining payout command transmission processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 1; 9 is a flowchart for explaining random number update processing 2; It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining winning number counter update processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining effect command setting processing; It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a diagram for explaining the change in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which Toku-zu 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting port 2 switch process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining allocation processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining high probability fluctuation frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a fanfare/interval process transition setting process; It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during the special figure 1 small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining processing transition setting processing during special figure 2 small hit fanfare. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during the opening of the big winning opening. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot operation transition setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining design variation control processing. 9 is a flowchart for explaining segment LED editing processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining magnet fraud monitoring processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining start port 1 signal editing processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining the number-of-symbols-fixed-count signal editing process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the variation|variation aspect of the pattern for production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining production lottery processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a display mode in the number-of-games display section in the first modified example; It is a figure explaining the display mode in the display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the display apparatus in a 1st modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing in a second modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 1 game processing in the second modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 2 game processing in the second modification. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process in the second modification. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification is performed in the third modification. It is a diagram for explaining a change in the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the third modification. It is a diagram for explaining a change in the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in the third modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the batch display apparatus in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus at the time of being interrupted in a 4th modification, and a special figure indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus at the time of being interrupted in a 4th modification, and a special figure indicator. It is a flow chart for explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the processing during special figure 2 fluctuation in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 2 game processing in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 jackpot end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing in the fourth modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of a structure of the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of a structure of the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of a structure of the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of a structure of the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of a structure of the special figure indicator in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in a 6th modification. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining transmission timings of probability information commands in the sixth modified example; It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in a 6th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via hinges 13 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

Further, on the upper part of the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for announcing abnormal payout are provided. In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration and presentation, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. there is Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls dispensed when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect operation section 700 for receiving an operation input from the player. This effect operation unit 700 is a effect button 25 that incorporates a effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. A touch panel 29 is provided for receiving operation input. A key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

In addition, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper tray 21, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for direct operation, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by the player operating the effect operation unit 300, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), effect etc. that intervenes the player's operation can be performed. can be done.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.). A board effect device 44 is provided on the right side of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. The board rendering device 44 is in the shape of a quadrangular prism, and is rotatable about an axis along the length direction.

On the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7). In addition, general winning openings 35 are arranged on the left side and below the center case 40 in the game area 32 . The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 7).

Furthermore, on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. The special variable winning device 38 is provided with a movable member on the side of the game area 32, and depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the movable member becomes almost vertical and the large winning opening is closed (the player A closed state disadvantageous to the player) is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) capable of accepting the game ball that is tilted to the left and flows down the game area 32.例文帳に追加

That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by a movable member driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) as a driving device, and is in a special game state (first special game state). ), during the middle or small winning game state (second special game state), the closed state of the big winning hole is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided. Inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two large winning hole switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the large winning hole is detected by one of the large winning hole switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

Below the center case 40, the first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and the second special drawing fluctuation display that give the starting condition of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting the game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided. This prize winning device 90 is provided with a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inlet 91 to the first start prize winning port 36 and the second start prize winning port 97 (see FIG. 6). . The game ball that has entered the first start winning port 36 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the game ball that has entered the second starting winning port 97 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 97a (Fig. 7) that forms the starting port 2 switch 1. reference).

In addition, on the left side of the winning device 90, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). ing. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it falls down to the front side to open and allow game balls to easily flow in. This movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 7) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by a starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7) forming the starting port 2 switch 2. FIG. In addition, below the prize winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port.

FIG. 3 shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the winning device 90. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3( a ), inside the winning device 90 , a sorting member 92 is provided at a position directly below the inlet 91 . In addition, a first start prize winning port 36 is arranged on the lower left side of the distribution member 92, and a second start prize winning port 97 is arranged on the lower right side of the distribution member. Furthermore, a cover member 93 is provided so as to cover the front side of the distribution member 92 , the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 . The cover member 93 is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game balls in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distribution member 92 is an inverted T-shaped member that can rotate around a rotation shaft 92a that extends in the front-rear direction. Of the three arms extending from the position where the rotation shaft 92a is arranged, on the left of the arm 92b extending upward is an arm 92c extending to the left adjacent to the arm 92b. A first holding portion 92e that temporarily holds a game ball is formed by an arm portion 92d extending to the right adjacent to the arm portion 92b extending upward to the right of the arm portion 92b extending upward. A second holding portion 92f is formed to temporarily hold the game ball. In the distribution member 92, the first holding portion 92e can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 91 as shown in FIG. and a position where the second holding portion 92f can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3(b).

As shown in FIG. 3A, when the first holding portion 92e is in a position capable of receiving the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91, the second holding portion 92f directs the game ball toward the second starting winning hole 97. is allowed to flow down. Also, as shown in FIG. 3(b), when the second holding portion 92f is in a position capable of receiving the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 91, the first holding portion 92e is directed toward the first starting winning port 36. It will be in a state in which the game ball is made to flow down.

The upwardly extending arm portion 92b is provided with a first magnet 92g, and the winning device 90 faces the first magnet 92g when the upwardly extending arm portion 92b becomes vertical. The rear wall of the is provided with a second magnet 94 . The first magnet 92g and the second magnet 94 are arranged such that the poles on the opposing sides are the same, and the repulsive force causes the arms 92b extending upward to move left and right instead of remaining in a vertical state. , so as to be biased to rotate to either As a result, when the distribution member 92 stops rotating, either the first holding portion 92e or the second holding portion 92f is always ready to receive the game ball that has flowed into the inlet 91. FIG.

In such a winning device 90, as shown in FIG. 3(b), a game ball that has flowed into the inlet 91 can be received toward the inlet 91 between the first holding portion 92e and the second holding portion 92f. It is held by one of the holding portions in the state. When a game ball is held by one of the holding parts, the distribution member 92 rotates in the direction of the holding part due to the weight of the game ball, and the held game ball is positioned in the direction in which the holding part rotates. It flows down toward the 1 start prize-winning port 36 or the 2nd start prize-winning port 97 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 3(a), when the game ball that has flowed in is received by the first holding portion 92e, the distribution member 92 rotates to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball enters the first start winning hole 36. , the second holding portion 92g stops in a state where the next game ball can be received, as shown in FIG. 3(b). Then, as shown in FIG. 3(b), when the inflowing game ball is received by the second holding portion 92f, the distribution member 92 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball enters the second start winning opening 97. , the first holding portion 92e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received, as shown in FIG. 3(a).

The game ball that has flowed down from the holding part is likely to flow into the first start prize winning port 36 or the second start prize winning port 97, but it may not flow in, and if it does not flow in, it flows out of the prize winning device 90. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portion is strong, there is a high possibility that it will not flow into the first start prize winning port 36 or the second start prize winning port 97 . It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to always win a prize in one of the starting prize openings.

Further, by rotating the distribution member 92, the other holding portion, which is not the holding portion holding the game ball, faces the inflow port 91 and becomes ready to receive the game ball. Then, the game ball received next time is guided to the winning opening on the side of the other holding portion. As a result, the game balls sequentially flowing into the inflow port 91 are alternately distributed to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 .

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided on the left side of the winning device 90, and there is a possibility that the game ball that did not enter the first starting winning port 36 will win the normal variable winning device 37. ing. In addition, a general prize winning port 35 is provided on the right side of the prize winning device 90 so that there is a possibility that the game ball that did not enter the second start prize winning port 97 may enter the general prize winning port 35. . In addition, at a position to the left of the winning device 90 and to the upper right of the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball flowing down from the left side of the normal variable winning device 37 is directed toward the normal variable winning device 37. A guide 98 is provided for changing the

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), there are a first special figure variation display game, a second special figure variation display game, and a normal special figure variation display game. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a normal pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize in the pattern starting gate 34 and for displaying various information.

As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator for the first special figure variation display game (first special figure variation display unit ) 51 (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 (D2) for the second special figure variation display game, and a variation display for the general figure variation display game composed of LED lamps 53 (normal figure display) 53 (D8, D10, D18), and memory display units 54, 55, 56 (D11 to D16) for notifying the start memory number of each variable display game, which are also configured by LED lamps. Prepare.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a second game state display unit (second game state display, time saving state notification unit) 58 (D17) that lights when the time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the gaming machine 10 A third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 59 (D9) that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the number of rounds at the time of the big hit ( A round display section 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the opening/closing number of the special variable winning device 38 is provided. The collective display device 50 further includes a display unit (display) that lights up when a big win occurs to notify the occurrence of a big win, and a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. A display unit (right-handed informing unit) or the like may be provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, as shown in FIG. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is fluctuating, and it is configured to be able to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The normal figure indicator 53 flashes a lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(c), among the lamps D8, D10, and D18 that constitute the general-purpose indicator 53, only the lamp D8 is turned on when the result of the game is lost. When the game result is a win and the win stop pattern number is "1", only the lamp D10 is lit, and when the game result is a win and the hit stop pattern number is "2", only the lamp D18 is lit. When the result of the game is winning and the winning stop symbol number is "3", the lamps D10 and D18 are turned on.

In addition, the general pattern holding indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= number of reservations) of the general pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 53, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(d), of the lamps D15 and D16 that make up the normal figure reservation indicator 56, both the lamps D15 and D16 are turned off when the number of reservations is "0". When the number of reservations is "1", only the lamp D15 is turned on, and when the number of reservations is "2", both the lamps D15 and D16 are turned on, and when the number of reservations is "3". is configured to blink the lamp D15 and turn on the lamp D16, and to blink both the lamps D15 and D16 when the number of reservations is "4".

The special figure 1 pending display device 54 indicates the number of the first start memory (special figure 1 pending) that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51. Displayed by flashing or lighting. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(e), among the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special figure 1 holding indicator 54, when the special figure 1 start memory number is "0", the lamp D11 and Both lamps D12 are turned off, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only lamp D11 is lit, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "2", both lamp D11 and lamp D12 is lit, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp D11 is blinking and the lamp D12 is lit, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "4", the lamp D11 and lamp D12 are configured to be in a blinking state. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

The special figure 2 pending display 55 indicates the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 pending) which is the execution right of the second special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. , flashing, and lighting. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(e), among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 holding indicator 55, when the special figure 2 start memory number is "0", the lamp D13 and Both lamps D14 are turned off, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D13 is lit, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "2", both lamps D13 and D14 is lit, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "3", the lamp D13 is blinking and the lamp D14 is lit, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "4", the lamp D13 and lamp D14 are configured to be in a blinking state. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

The second game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. When the function is not activated), the lamp is turned off, and when the time saving state is generated (when the variable time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variable state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state based on the big win is not in progress, the lamp is turned off. turn on the lamp to be used. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(g), when the selected number of rounds is "16" among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display section 60, the lamps D5 to D7 are turned on. , the lamps D4 to D6 are turned on when the selected number of rounds is "8", and the lamp D3 is turned on when the selected number of rounds is "2". It should be noted that the round display section may be composed of a 7-segment type display. Note that the configuration of the collective display device 50 may be configured as shown in a fifth modification of the second embodiment, which will be described later.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, in the upper left part of the center case 40, a fourth pattern for executing a decoration special figure variation display game separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41, and a start memory are displayed. An information display device 800 is provided for displaying numbers.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the information display device 800 is composed of six LEDs L1 to L6 arranged in a line. As shown in FIG. 5(b), L1 is the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. Further, L2 is a special figure 2 fourth symbol LED that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. In addition, L3 and L4 are special figure 1 reservation LEDs 1 and 2 that display the first start memory number, and L5 and L6 are special figure 2 reservation LEDs 1 and 2 that display the second start memory number.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), in L1 and L2, the corresponding special figure variation display game is changed by blinking the LED to indicate that it is changing, and when the special figure variation display game ends, the game The game result is displayed as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the result of . In the case of this embodiment, it is turned off when it is out, and it is turned on when it is a big hit or a small hit. It should be noted that the display mode in the case of a small hit may be a display mode different from that of losing or a big win. For example, it may be made to blink in a manner different from blinking during fluctuation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5(d), L3 and L4 are the right to execute the first special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51. The number is displayed by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting of a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 1 start memory number is "0", both L3 and L4 are turned off, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only L3 is lit. When the number of FIG. When the starting memory number is "4", both L3 and L4 are set to blink. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5(d), L5 and L6 are the right to execute the second special figure variation display game displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52. The number is displayed by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting of a plurality of LEDs. In the case of this embodiment, when the special figure 2 start memory number is "0", both L5 and L6 are turned off, and when the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only L5 is lit. When the number of FIG. When the starting memory number is "4", both L5 and L6 are configured to flash. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example.

It should be noted that the luminance of the information display device 800 may be adjusted so as not to affect the game. For example, when the information display device 800 is provided in the vicinity of the inlet 91 of the winning device 90, there arises a problem that the incoming game balls become difficult to see due to the light emission. In order to solve such problems, the brightness of the information display device 800 may be adjusted. Methods of adjusting luminance include a method of lowering the current value to be passed through the LED using a resistor, a method of adjusting by software control such as PWM control, and a method of using these together.

Since the information display device 800 is provided separately from the display device 41, the display region of the display device 41 is not occupied by the display of the fourth pattern, and the display region can be effectively utilized. In addition, when a movable effect member or the like is arranged, the information display device 800 is placed at a position outside the movement range of the movable effect member so that the information display device 800 is not covered during the operation. Deploy. Also, the fourth pattern may be displayed on the display device 41 instead of the information display device 800, but in this case, it is displayed at a position where it is not hidden by an effect member or the like so that it is always visible. In addition, if a movable effect member or the like is provided, it may be displayed at a position outside the operating range of the movable effect member so as not to cover the fourth pattern during the operation process. It is always visible by moving to a position out of the range of motion according to the motion of the member.

FIG. 6 shows the details of the effect operation unit 700. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a plan view of the effect operation unit 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the effect operation unit 700 of the present embodiment includes a effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. It is That is, the effect operation unit 700 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

Sensitivity setting data, LED luminance data, and the like are transmitted from the effect control board (effect control device) 300 to the effect operation unit 700, and the effect button A push button signal (press detection signal) from the production button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the (push button) 25 and a touch ON/OFF signal (contact/non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a provided in the touch panel 29 are output. configured to be

In the case of the present embodiment, the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the effect button (push button) 25 is operated to press the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 (the operation of pressing the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 and pressing down the effect operation unit 700). ). Further, a plurality of points are provided on the upper surface of the effect operation section 700, and a touch sensor provided on the touch panel 29 detects a contact operation on the points provided on the upper surface of the effect operation section 700.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(b), nine points of "TSW1" to "TSW8" points and "Pa" point are provided as a plurality of points. More specifically, the “TSW4” point provided in the center of the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700, the “TSW1” point provided to the left of the “TSW4” point, and the back side (game A "TSW3" point provided on the board 30 side), a "TSW6" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point, and a "TSW8" provided on the front side (player side) of the "TSW4" point. 'TSW2' point provided between 'TSW1' point and 'TSW3' point, 'TSW5' point provided between 'TSW3' point and 'TSW6' point, and 'TSW6' A "TSW7" point provided between the "TSW8" point and the "Pa" point provided between the "TSW8" point and the "TSW1" point are provided. Note that the number of points is not limited to nine, and can be changed arbitrarily. Further, in FIG. 6B, for the sake of convenience, the points "TSW1" to "TSW8" are indicated as "TSW1" to "TSW8", respectively. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

The points where the touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 are the eight points "TSW1" to "TSW8", and the touch operation is not detected at the "Pa" point. Of course, the contact operation may also be detected at the "Pa" point. Also, at each of the nine points "TSW1" to "TSW8" and "Pa", an independent system of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs) is arranged.

The "Pa" point can be obtained, for example, by using the "Pa" point LED as a notification lamp for a one-shot announcement, or by sequentially lighting the LEDs of each point on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 like a roulette. LEDs can be used for certain effects, such as using the "Accuracy (or probability variable confirmation)" point, and using the "Pa" point LED for predictive accuracy effects.

Here, the lighting brightness of the LEDs (specifically, the LEDs arranged at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, the “Pa” point, etc.) for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 700 can be adjusted by brightness adjustment (hall setting , Player adjustment) are excluded from the target. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor has a function to forcibly turn off the touch when the touch ON state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)). signal output function). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured so as not to be able to detect continuous contact operations for a predetermined period of time or longer.

The player's operation detected by the effect operation unit 700 includes, for example, the operation shown in FIG. 6(c). A "single hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 700 once, and a "continuous hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 700 a plurality of times within a predetermined time interval. A “long press” is an operation of holding down the effect operation unit 700 for a predetermined time or longer, and a “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29 . ““Pa” operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press” is a long press while in contact with the “Pa” point or one (or both) of the two adjacent points “TSW1” and “TSW8”. "Flick" is an operation of sliding the touch panel 29 while touching the touch panel 29 as if it were flipped. Of course, the operations to be detected are not limited to these operations.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and enters the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening. 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port Prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7).

On the other hand, in the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 7) consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal pattern variation display game is performed. In addition, a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not been completed, or a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation display game is won and a normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal pattern start memory number, the normal pattern start memory number is added ( +1) and one general pattern starting memory is stored. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game. to determine the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

The general figure variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed by the variation display unit (universal figure display device) 53 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of this LED are normal. Makes identification information (normal pattern, normal pattern). The normal figure display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after the information is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and the result is displayed. You can If the stop display of this normal pattern fluctuation display game results in a normal pattern identification result, the normal pattern wins, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole inside the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

Winning balls to the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97 and the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a provided inside, respectively. The game ball that has won the first start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), A game ball that has won the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the second special figure variable display game, and is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) as a second start memory. stored in In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, and the extracted random number values are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 7). To the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM), each predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times) is stored as a special figure start memory. And, the number of memories of this special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and the center The display device 41 of the case 40 and the information display device 800 are also displayed as decoration special figure starting memory display.

The game control device 100, based on the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, or their starting memory, the special figure 1 indicator 51 (fluctuation display device) or A first or second special figure variation display game is performed with the special figure 2 indicator 52 (variation display device). The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special symbols, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. Also, a display device (image display device) 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed. Then, as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and a special game state ( so-called jackpot state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 800 corresponding to this also becomes the special result mode. In addition, as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes the small hit result mode, it becomes a small hit and a small hit game state (so-called , small hit state). Moreover, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 800 corresponding to this is also the small hit result mode.

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 in the left variation display area (first special symbol), the right variation display area ( 2nd special symbol), in each of medium fluctuation display area (3rd special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variability) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing symbols are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 carries out a variable display game with decorative special symbols corresponding to the number of special symbol starting memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve interest. Also, in the information display device 800, the decorative special figure variation display game is executed using L1 and L2 as described above.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each special figure fluctuation display so as not to be executed at the same time. A game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁

In addition, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of starting memories is 0, the first start winning port 36 (or the second starting winning port 37 or normal variable winning device 37), the starting memory is stored with the generation of the starting right, the number of starting memories is incremented by 1, and the first special is immediately based on the starting memory. A figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started, and 1 is subtracted from the starting memory number at this time. On the other hand, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played and the special figure variation display game has ended. When the game ball wins in the first start winning port 36 (or the second starting winning port 37 or the normal variable winning device 37) in the state where it is not, or in the special game state or the small winning game state, the start If the number of memories is less than the upper limit, 1 is added to the number of starting memories and one starting memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state or When it comes to the end of the small winning game state), the starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored starting memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a in the second starting winning port 37 and the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, winning slot switch 35a, and big winning slot switch 38a are equipped with coils for magnetic detection, and are non-contact magnetic proximity sensors that detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coils. (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and a reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operation state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state (time-saving operation state (general electric support state)), the number of start memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, any one Select and acquire a fluctuation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starter 1 switch 36a in the first starter winning port 36, a second starter winning port 97 and a normal variable winning device. It is connected to the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a (starting port 2 switches 1 and 2) in 37, the gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided for receiving a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converting it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. ing. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. be done. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test apparatus (not shown). Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (universal electrical solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the open/close data of the. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be stored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 800. , a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, the random number for determining the hit of the normal game is extracted and the ROM 111B is extracted. It compares with the judgment value stored in , and performs the process of judging the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed on the normal pattern display device for a predetermined period of time, processing is performed to display the normal pattern variability display game which is stopped and displayed. When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a win, the normal pattern display device displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third winning stop patterns, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated. Then, control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning port 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display A random number value for judging a big hit of the game is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of judging the hit/missing of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the second start winning opening 97 or the starting opening 2 switches 37a, 97a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the starting memory is stored, and based on this starting memory, the second A random number value for judging the big hit of the special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (production control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the process of displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 performs the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning opening 37). It constitutes game control means for performing progress control.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 and the information display device 800 perform processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small win result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. At the same time, a process for generating a special game state or a small winning game state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state and the small winning game state, for example, the CPU 111A causes the large winning opening solenoid 38b to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the big winning opening. and control. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game, after the end of the special game state, as a game state time saving state (also referred to as a specific game state, general figure high probability state, general electric support state). It can occur. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first winning stop pattern, The opening time of the second per stop pattern (general electric open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 ms x 2 times), the opening time of the third per stop design (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 m seconds x 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000ms is 1000ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the time to convert longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

FIG. 9 shows the probability of winning and the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 9A, the probability of winning a big hit is the same between the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Also, the probability of a small hit is different between the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. The probability of this small win does not change regardless of the state of the big win probability.

FIG. 9(b) shows the types of hits, the average number of won prize balls and distribution probabilities for each type of hits. There are 16R probability variable A to F, 6R probability variable, and 2R probability variable A and B in the jackpot types. 16R variable probability A to F are all 16 rounds that can be executed in the special game state, but the content of the effect and the operation mode of the special variable winning device 38 in each round are different. In addition, the 2R variable probability A and B both have two rounds that can be executed in the special game state, but the contents of the effects are different.

Further, after the end of the special game state based on the big hit, the high probability state (specific game state) is maintained until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 80 times). Therefore, any kind of jackpot is a probability variable jackpot. That is, the game control device 100 serves as specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the variable display game is executed in a manner advantageous to the player for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Of course, it may include a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state. In addition, in the case of 16R probability variation A to F, 6R probability variation, and 2R probability variation A, over the period until the special figure variation display game is executed for a predetermined number of times (here, 80 times) after the end of the special game state, the normal variation winning device The operation state of 37 becomes a time-saving operation state. In addition, in the case of 2R probability variable A, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes the normal operating state after the special game state ends.

The operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in each round includes a long opening and a short opening, with the possible opening time being 29 seconds for the long opening and the possible opening time being 0.2 seconds for the short opening. Therefore, the number of winning balls increases as the number of rounds with long opening increases. 16R probability variation A, B, F will be long open in any round. Therefore, it is substantially a 16-round jackpot (actual 16R). These are different in the content of production. In addition, the 16R probability variable C is long open up to 12 rounds and short open from 13 to 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is a 12-round jackpot (actual 12R). In addition, the 16R probability variable D is long open up to 8 rounds and short open from 9 to 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is substantially an 8-round jackpot (actual 8R). In addition, 16R variable E is long open up to 4 rounds and short open from 5 to 16 rounds. Therefore, it can be said that it is substantially a 4-round jackpot (actual 4R). In addition, the 6R probability variation is long open in any round, and the 2R probability variation A and B are short open in any round. In the case of a small hit, as in the case of 2R probability variation A and B, a short opening of 0.2 seconds is performed twice.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved is A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the standby time starts, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. detectable. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitor signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), ie, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the game machine is powered off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the value of the timer is 0. is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S19). match the checksum (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 11, and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 11 to perform initialization. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

In step S21 of FIG. 11, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), skip steps S23 and S24 and proceed to step S25. Also, if the special figure is in the high probability (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the collective display device 50 device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. proceed to In the case of this embodiment, in step S25, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, screen specification command (customer waiting demo screen command if customer waiting, other Then, a plurality of commands such as the command for the recovery screen are sent. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, the model designation command, the special figure 1 reservation number command, the special figure 2 reservation number command, the probability information command, the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen, and for a predetermined time ( For example, for 30 seconds), a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (Big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number), random number to determine the hit pattern of the normal pattern (hit pattern random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S33), interrupt is permitted (step S34). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure is performed. It is determined whether or not the monitor signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S35 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. In addition, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and it is only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be turned on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the interrupt is temporarily prohibited (step S39), and all A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) is performed. ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on the output data set in various processes.

When a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S105), random number update processing 1 (step S106), and random number update processing 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it monitors whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the normal gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. A winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game and a normal figure game process (step S110) for performing processing relating to a normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content, the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine if there is any abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is any abnormality Monitoring processing (step S113) is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a is monitored, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switches 37a, 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the normal variable winning device 37, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and the winning Before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the game result pre-determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning prize in advance.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win are performed. Processing during special figure display (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A20) is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) pertaining to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the special figure game process is finished. do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hardware random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch here), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the first starting port (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A106 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize to the first starting opening (step A103; Y), a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) is created. After preparing (step A104), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A105) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A106), and performs hardware random number acquisition processing (step A107). In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch here), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port (step A108).
When it is determined in step A108 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A108; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A108, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A108; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A109). It shifts to the processing of A111 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A109, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A109; N), it is determined whether or not the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A110).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

In step A110, when it is determined that the electric fraud is not occurring (step A110; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second start opening (second start winning opening 97, normal variable winning apparatus 37) is prepared. After (step A111), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A112) is performed, and the starting opening switch monitoring processing ends. Further, when it is determined in step A110 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A110; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. It should be noted that, in the case of winning the second starting prize opening 97, the processing of steps A111 and A112 may be performed without performing the processing of steps A109 and A110.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A105 and A112) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a or the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, 97a.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switches 37a and 97a, the information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is sent to the gaming machine. 10, the start signal output count is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows ( Step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switches 37a, 97a, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135 ). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), and save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process of steps A102 and A107 is the RWM jackpot. Save in the random number storage area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, a small winning design random number is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step A143). Furthermore, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A144), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A145) is performed.
Then, prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of start opening switches and special figure reservations to be monitored (step A146), perform production command setting processing (step A147), and perform special figure start opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning region of the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, or the normal variable winning device 37. and a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory to be the execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port (first starting winning port 36) as the first starting value with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (second starting winning port 97, normal variable winning device 37) are stored as a memory, and are used as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. Remember.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A145) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 16, first, a big-hit determination process (step A151) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. If the determination result is a big hit (step A152; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A153), and the big hit pattern random number prepared in step A140 is checked. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A160.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A152; N), a small hit determination process (step A155) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, if the result of determination is not a small hit (step A156; N), stop symbol information for losing is set (step A159), and the process proceeds to step A160.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A156; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A157), and stop design information corresponding to the small hit design random number prepared in step A142 is displayed. Obtained (step A158), and proceeds to the process of step A160.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A160), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A161). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A162) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A163).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A164), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A165), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A162 and the variation pattern setting process in step A163 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is displayed at the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the effect control device 300 earlier, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, and the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify result-related information to

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). (e.g., determination of whether or not)) constitutes prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the big winning gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether the big winning gate is being opened (step A201). . If the big winning opening is being processed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the large winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", that is, whether the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A201; N) A202).
If the large winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the big winning hole remaining balls are not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small winning process is being performed (step A203 ).
If it is during the small hit process (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Also, if the small hit process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special game process number is "9", that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204).
Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches "0", the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
Then, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

If there is no input to the big winning slot switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning slot switch 2 (the other big winning slot switch 38a) (step A210). Also, when there is an input to the big winning hole switch 1 (step A206; Y), a big winning hole count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 38a) (step A210).

If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). Also, if there is an input to the big winning hole switch 2 (step A210; Y), a big winning hole count command is prepared (step A211), and effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening is in progress (step A215).
When the big winning opening remaining balls are being processed (step A215; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and when the big winning opening remaining balls are not being processed (step A215; N), the small winning opening remaining balls are processed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; 2) is added to the big winning hole count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning hole count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9") (step A217). A218).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether or not during small hit processing (step A221). If the small winning process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the small winning process is in progress (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area The value for ending the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure pending number, which is the sum of the first start memory number and the second start memory number, is 0 (step A301). That is, it is determined whether or not there is starting memory.

If the special figure pending number is not 0 (step A301; N), that is, if there is starting memory, it is determined whether the starting memory to be processed this time is special figure 1 pending (first starting memory) (step A302 ).
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the first starting memory and the second starting memory are digested in the order of occurrence, the starting memory to be processed this time, which is the starting memory for starting the special figure variation display game, is the first starting memory. It is determined whether it is memory or the second start memory, and processing for the corresponding special figure variation display game is performed.

If the start memory to be processed this time is special figure 1 reservation (first start memory) (step A302; Y), perform special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A303), corresponding to special figure 1 reservation number A decoration special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed. Then, the processing transition setting processing (step A306) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the start memory to be processed this time is not special figure 1 reservation (first start memory) (step A302; N), that is, if it is special figure 2 reservation (second start memory), special figure 2 fluctuation start Perform processing (step A307), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A308), and perform production command setting processing (step A309). Then, the processing shift setting process (step A310) during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

Also, if the number of pending special figures is 0 (step A301; Y), that is, if there is no starting memory, it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A311), and the customer waiting demonstration has not started. In case (step A311; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).
Subsequently, prepare a customer waiting demo command (step A313), perform the effect command setting process (step A314), perform the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315), and end the special figure normal process . On the other hand, at step A311, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A303) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation A process of setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether the display game is a big hit, and a small hit for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set deviation information and small hit information in the hit flag.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop design (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A335). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 19 is performed for the second start memory. It is done as

As shown in FIG. 20, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation A process of setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the display game is a big hit, and a small hit for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set deviation information and small hit information in the hit flag.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by these special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

In addition, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning port (first starting winning port 36), and the second starting winning port (first starting winning port 36). The 2-start prize winning port 97 constitutes variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball by the normal variable prize winning device 37). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

Then, the information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, according to the determined variation pattern Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information about the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information about the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure fluctuation process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602 ). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds, and the stop symbol pattern is set. When the pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds.
Next, the process shift setting process (step A603) during special figure display is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing (step A702) for clearing the small hit flag area is performed.
Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing (step A704) of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. Related test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and it is a big hit (step A706). If determined as A706; Y), a test signal related to the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, Special symbol 1 per signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (16, 8 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM round Save in the numerical upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), production command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called definite jackpot, etc.). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game Set (step A719), and save the set jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning slot fraudulent winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. A fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, at step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit or not (step A725).
At step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), high probability fluctuation number update processing ( Step A726), effect mode information check processing (step A727) regarding the setting of the effect mode is performed.

Then, the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and effect command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A731), effect command setting processing (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
Moreover, in step A728, when it determines with it being in the high probability of a special figure (step A728; Y), it transfers to the process of step A733.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the process transition setting process 1 (step A734) during small hit fanfare is performed, and the process during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), high probability fluctuation number update processing for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games to be made into a high probability state (Step A735), effect mode information check processing (step A736) regarding the setting of the effect mode is performed, the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining It is determined whether the number of revolutions matches (step A738). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.

In step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in production and the number of rotations remaining in switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.
On the other hand, in step A738, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A738; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command is set. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction, etc. from occurring in

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). , effect command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

After that, a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907), During the opening of the big winning opening, the process shift setting process (step A909) is performed, and the fanfare/interval process ends.
Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the large winning opening opening time for long opening (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A908). , the process shift setting process (step A909) during the opening of the big winning opening is performed, and the fanfare/interval process is terminated.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the big winning opening (step A12) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and a special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).

If the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005), An interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, large winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning hole is open. End the process.

Also, if the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching judgment value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006), prepares an interval command (step A1007), performs effect command setting processing (step A1010), performs large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), and ends processing during opening of large winning opening. do.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (eg 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special game state is saved. Prepare an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the time (step A1009), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), The processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area of RWM, and the current round is It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired. (step A1103), and sets a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is greater than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 to process. Also, when the number of rounds is not greater than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down performance corresponds to the performance of executing a round continuation notification performance for notifying whether or not the big winning round is continued, and notifying that the big winning round is not continued in the round continuation notification performance. When the jackpot type is 16R probability variable BF (see FIG. 9), the production from the start of the special game state to the final round with long opening is a common production, and the final round with long opening In the round where there is a possibility of becoming, in the interval period after the special figure fluctuation winning device 38 is closed, a round continuation notification effect is performed to notify whether or not the long opening continues in the next round. That is, the round continuation notification effect is performed in the interval periods of 4R, 8R and 12R.

For example, from 1R to 4R, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the round continuation notification effect is executed in the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 is closed at the 4th R. If it is 16R probability variable B to D, F, the round continuation is reported in the round continuation reporting effect, and the big winning opening is opened long in the 5th and subsequent rounds. In addition, if it is 16R variable probability E, round discontinuation is notified (rank down effect) in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened by short opening in the round after the 5th round.

After that, in 16R probability variable B to D, F, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 5R to 8R, and the round continues in the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 closes at the 8R. Execute the notification effect. In the case of 16R variable probability B, C, and F, round continuation is reported in the round continuation reporting effect, and the big prize opening is opened long in the 9th and subsequent rounds. In addition, if it is 16R probability variable D, round discontinuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big prize opening is opened by short opening in the 9th and subsequent rounds.

Furthermore, in the 16R variable probability B, C, and F, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 9R to 12R, and the round continues during the interval period after the special variable winning device 38 closes at the 12R. Execute the notification effect. If it is 16R variable probability B, F, the continuation of the round is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is opened with a long opening even in the 13th and subsequent rounds. In addition, if it is 16R probability variable C, round discontinuation (rank down effect) is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is opened by short opening in the 13th and subsequent rounds.

When the big winning opening opening information is not a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the big winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4, 8, 12R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), the interval time for the rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. do.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare/interval process transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and large winning opening remaining ball processing exit.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag saving area that stores the production mode when the special result was derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the big winning opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), set the ending time (for example 1.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area Save (step A1113). After that, big hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in this jackpot end processing, first, it is determined whether time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (step A1201).
When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1202), and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1203). . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is obtained (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (step A1206). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A1207), and the next mode of the production mode set after the special game state is completed. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in either "with high probability/time saving" or "high probability/no time saving". In the case of this embodiment, when the jackpot ends, it will always be in a probability variable state (so-called ST state), so the probability information commands are "high probability, time saving, production mode A", "high probability, time saving, production mode B". , “High probability, time saving, production mode C”, “high probability, no time saving, production mode A”, which are not used in this process, but are not used in this process, but there are also “low probability, no time saving, production mode A”, “ There are low probability, no time saving, production mode B” and “low probability, no time saving, production mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, prepare a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation frequency (step A1214), perform production command setting processing (step A1215), perform special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1216), hit the jackpot End the termination process.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the minor winning fanfare process (step A15) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the process during the small hit fanfare, a process transition setting process (step A1301) during the small hit is performed.

[Small hit middle process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the process shift setting process (step A1301) during the small hit in the process during the small hit fanfare described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28(b), in the small hit middle process shift setting process, first, set "8" for the small hit middle process as the process number (step A1311), and set the process number to the special game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small winning game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and signal regarding the start of the small winning operation (for example, special electric role 1 ON signal during operation) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, ON data for turning on the big prize winning solenoid 38b is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information in the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening (step A1316), and save the small winning operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small winning middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), to end the process transition setting process in the small hit.

[Small hit medium processing]
Next, the details of the process (step A16) during the small hit in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the small hit middle process, first, the value of the small hit middle control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") or more is determined (step A1402).
When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small End the winning process.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), prepare a command for the small hit end screen (step A1407), perform the production command setting process (step A1408), A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the process during the small hit ends.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(a), in the small-hit residual ball processing, a small-hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small-hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the above-described small-hit remaining ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(b), in the small hit end processing shift setting process, first, "10" for the small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is set to the special game processing. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is turned OFF). is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, clear the information of the big winning opening count number area (step A1515), clear the information of the control pointer area during the small hit (for example, 0 clear) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing transition setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the special game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the small hit end process, first, the flag is loaded from the special game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special high probability ( step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop pattern) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is obtained (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is obtained, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RAM It saves in the area (step A1606), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1616.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A1610), Effect command setting processing (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Further, a high-probability variation count command corresponding to the high-probability variation count is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1616), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1617) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general-purpose game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the normal map display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15 ) to end the general-purpose game process.
On the other hand, in step B4, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, when it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of normal diagram reservations is acquired and the number of normal diagram reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") or not (step B102 ).

If the number of reserved general patterns is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved general patterns is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal patterns after updating is calculated. (step B104). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area of the RWM (step B106), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. exit.

Also, if it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 34a at step B101 (step B101; N), or if it is determined that the normal pattern reservation number is not less than the upper limit at step B102 (step B102; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general/universal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the normal electrical winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is executing the opening operation for a predetermined number of times in a winning state in the normal pattern variation display game. It is determined whether there is (step B201). Then, when the game is in the middle of a regular game (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If so, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the general electric counter after the update is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value (for example, "4") for the end of the hit operation is saved in the control pointer area during the normal hit (step B205), the normal game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the normal electric winning prize switch monitoring process is started. finish. That is, if there is a normal electric winning prize of more than the upper limit value during the winning state of the general figure, the winning state of the general figure is terminated on the way at that time.

Also, if it is determined in step B201 that the normal game is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204 When it is determined that the general electrical count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the general electrical winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B201; Y ) performs the general pattern normal processing transition setting processing 1 (step B322), and ends the general pattern normal processing. Also, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the hit pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) ( Step B302), the winning random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of winning results in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is normal. It is determined whether it is in the normal pattern high probability made higher than the probability (that is, the normal pattern low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B304).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B304; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B305), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B304 ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B307). is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B308.

If the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the winning flag Save the lost pattern information in the area (step B309), set the lost stop pattern number (step B310), save the lost pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information region (step B311), set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop Save in the pattern area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B312), and the winning information loaded in step B302 Set the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the pattern random number (step B313), save the stop pattern information corresponding to the stop pattern number in the general pattern stop pattern information area (step B314), and set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop pattern. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1".
Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250".
In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step 315), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern game mode state is saved in the normal pattern game processing timer area (step B317). Here, 700 ms is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time at the normal pattern low probability, and 500 ms is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time at the normal pattern high probability. Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B318), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B319), and the normal figure reservation number is updated by -1 (step B320). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.
Then, the process shift setting process (step B321) is performed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the normal pattern normal process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503)

If the hit flag is not the winning information (step B503; N), the normal pattern normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B511) for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing is performed, and the normal pattern displaying process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal electric support is in progress (normal high probability) (step B504).

Then, if it is during the general electric support (in the general pattern high probability) (step B504; Y), the hit during processing setting table is set (step B505), and the winning start pointer corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information A value (for example, one of "0", "2", and "4") is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal per figure (step B506). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B507). After that, per normal pattern middle processing transition setting processing (step B210) is done, processing during normal pattern display ends.

On the other hand, if it is not during normal electric support (normal high probability) (step B504; N), set the hit start pointer value for normal time (for example, "4" because it opens once), Save in the control pointer area (step B508). Next, a general/universal electric opening time for normal use (for example, 100 ms regardless of the type of winning pattern) is set and saved in the general/universal pattern game processing timer area (step B509). After that, per normal pattern middle processing transition setting processing (step B210) is done, processing during normal pattern display ends.

[Medium processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the normal per pattern process, first, the control pointer during normal per pattern is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and end the processing during the normal pattern.
Also, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step B602; Y), without performing the process of updating the processing control pointer area during the normal pattern by +1 in step B603, normal electric operation transition The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process during the normal pattern is terminated.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the general electric operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described general pattern per middle process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (normal control pointer during normal pattern). I'm trying In this general electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37. After closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, save the wait time in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), save the OFF data in the normal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B613), and set the normal electric operation transition End the process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614, and in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the general electric open time, which is the open time, in the general electric game processing timer area (step B614), save the ON data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B615), The normal electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Further, if the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, where the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated and the normal electric remaining ball process is performed, so the process number is "4". is set (step B616). Then, this process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B617), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B619). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation shift setting process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as a wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is saved as a normal electric discharge time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as a normal electric residual ball processing time in step B618. .

Furthermore, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 1" during the normal pattern high probability, in step B506 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map displaying process, "500 ms" is acquired as the normal power open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the general electric power (normal variable prize winning device 37) opens for 500 msec because the electric power opening time is "500 msec", and after that, the control pointer during the normal figure hits "4". Therefore, the normal electric remaining bulb processing time of 600 msec is set.

In addition, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 2" in the normal pattern high probability, in step B506 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map displaying process, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec". The time is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "3", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. Normal electric remaining bulb processing time is set.

In addition, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 3" in the normal pattern high probability, in step B506 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B507 of the normal map displaying process, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec", and after that the normal control pointer is "0", so there is a wait of 200 msec. The time is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "1", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "2" for 200 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the power is opened for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so it is 600 msec. is set.

In addition, when the normal pattern stop pattern is any one of "hit pattern 1", "hit pattern 2", and "hit pattern 3" during the normal pattern low probability, step B508 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. , "4" is obtained as the value of the winning start pointer, and "100 msec" is obtained as the normal electric open time in step B509 of the normal diagram display process. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, the normal power is opened for 100 msec because the normal power open time is "100 msec". A remaining bulb processing time is set.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the end processing (step B13) per normal pattern in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the normal pattern per end process, the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General figure normal process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal pattern normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the normal pattern per end process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the normal game process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "0" relating to the normal game process is set (step B811), and the process number is changed to the normal game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of the winning of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal pattern 1 winning signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the irregularity monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (unauthorized monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electricity unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the general pattern normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described. Control processing by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIG. 40 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 40, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance operation section 700 (the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the effect operating section 700 is read in timer interrupt processing, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect operating section 700, the process of changing the content of the effect, etc. is performed.

Then, screen shot processing for capturing the displayed image is performed (step C10), setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player. Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting the operation of (step C11). Next, a random number update process (step C12) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 Step C13) is performed.

Next, scenario setting processing (step C14) and motion control processing (step C15) are performed to control the progress of the presentation, editing and transmission of drawing commands (step C16) are performed, and completion of drawing command preparation is set. (Step C17). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C18). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C18 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C18; N), the process of step C18 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C18 that it is time to switch frames (step C18; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C19).

After that, sound control processing (step C20) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration for controlling LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the information display device 800, and the frame decoration device 18 Control processing (step C22), movable body control processing (step C23) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the processing returns to the processing for clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Production button input process]
Next, details of the effect button input process (step C9) in the main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the effect button input process, first, the value of the current effect button state area is copied to the previous effect button state area (step C31), and the effect operation unit 700 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 ) is copied to the current effect button state area (step C32). Then, the state change data of the effect operation unit 700 (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is generated based on the value of the previous effect button state area and the value of the current effect button state area, and is saved in the effect button rising edge area. (step C33).
Here, the input from the effect operation unit 700 is read, for example, in timer interrupt processing with a cycle of 1 msec, chattering is removed, etc., and the state is established. Then, for example, in the effect button input process with a period of about 33.3 ms, the state of the input from the effect operation unit 700 is confirmed, the input contents are confirmed, and the effect is switched according to the result.

Next, it is determined whether the touch sensor 29a is valid (step C34).
If it is determined in step C34 that the touch sensor 29a is not valid (step C34; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C34 that the touch sensor 29a is valid (step C34; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to any of the touch sensors (step C35). Here, when the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "normal sensitivity", it is possible to detect a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700, and when the contact operation is detected, any touch It is determined that there is an input to the sensor. Further, when the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "high sensitivity", it is possible to detect a hand holding operation or a contact operation with respect to the effect operation unit 700, and the hand holding operation or contact operation is detected. At that time, it is determined that there is an input to any of the touch sensors.

If it is determined in step C35 that there is no input to any touch sensor (step C35; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C35 that there is an input to any of the touch sensors (step C35; Y), it is determined whether or not the spatial touch effect is being performed (step C36).
Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a spatial touch effect (aerial touch effect) and a button touch effect as touch effects, which are a type of effect (PB (push button) effect) using the effect operation unit 700. is configured to be executable.
During the spatial touch effect, the effect is changed by, for example, switching the effect displayed on the display device 41 when a hand holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected. During the space touch effect, the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "high sensitivity".
Further, during the button touch effect, when a touch operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, the effect is changed by switching the effect displayed on the display device 41 or the like. During the button touch effect, the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "normal sensitivity".

In step C36, if it is determined that the space touch effect is not being performed (step C36; N), that is, if the button touch effect is being performed and a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected, touch sensor control processing (step C37) is performed. conduct.
Then, as a result of the touch sensor control process (step C37), it is determined whether or not the input contents of the touch sensor 29a have been confirmed (step C38).
Specifically, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image or the like prompting a contact movement operation on the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41, and monitors a plurality of inputs such as a flick operation or a circular tracing operation. For example, when an operation that cannot be determined is requested, it is determined that the input contents have been determined when it is determined that the requested operation has been performed based on the results of multiple inputs. Here, the multiple input results are, for example, the state change data of the effect operation unit 700 generated at each step C33 of the multiple effect button input processing executed within the predetermined input content fixing period. It's about. In the case of this embodiment, since the effect button input process is performed at a cycle of about 33.3 msec, for example, if the input content determination period is set to 333 msec, the effect button input process is performed 10 times within the input content determination period. is executed to generate 10 state change data.
In addition, when the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image or the like prompting a touch operation to the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41, and requests an operation that can be confirmed only by monitoring one input such as a touch operation. (2) determines that the input content is confirmed when it is confirmed that the requested operation has been performed based on the current input result.

When it is determined in step C38 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a has not been finalized (step C38; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C38 that the input content of the touch sensor 29a has been determined (step C38; Y), it is determined whether or not the effective probability of the touch sensor 29a has been exceeded as a result of the touch sensor control processing (step C37). (step C39).
Specifically, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image that prompts a plurality of contact operations (continuous hit (continuous touch) operation, etc.) or a plurality of contact movement operations (rubbing operation, etc.) on the effect operation unit 700. When displayed on the display device 41, the ratio of the number of times that the input content has been determined in step C38 after the start of the display to the number of times of the effect button input processing executed after the start of the display is set in advance. It is determined that the validity probability has been exceeded when a predetermined ratio is reached, or when the number of times that the input content has been determined to have been determined in step C38 after the start of the display reaches a predetermined number of times. judge.
In addition, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, an image or the like prompting a one-time contact operation (one-touch operation, etc.) on the effect operation unit 700 on the display device 41, or a one-time contact movement operation on the effect operation unit 700. If an image or the like prompting (flick operation, etc.) is displayed on the display device 41, it is determined in step C38 that the input content has been finalized, so it is unconditionally determined that the validity probability has been exceeded.

If it is determined in step C39 that the probability of effectiveness of the touch sensor 29a has not been surpassed (step C39; N), the process proceeds to step C43.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C39 that the probability of the touch sensor 29a being effective has been surpassed (step C39; Y), the input result information of the touch sensor 29a is saved (step C40), and the touch sensor 29a is disabled. (step C41). Then, if the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "high sensitivity", it is set to "normal sensitivity" (step C42), and the process proceeds to step C43.

In step C43, it is determined whether or not the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a) is valid (step C43).
If it is determined in step C43 that the PUSH sensor is not valid (step C43; N), the effect button input process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C43, when it is determined that the PUSH sensor is valid (step C43; Y), there is an input to the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a), that is, a pressing operation on the production operation unit 700 is detected. It is determined whether it has been done (step C44).

If it is determined at step C44 that there is no input to the PUSH sensor (step C44; N), the effect button input process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C44, if it is determined that there is an input to the PUSH sensor (step C44; Y), that is, if a pressing operation on the production operation unit 700 is detected, the PUSH sensor (production button switch 25a) effective probability It is determined whether the breakthrough has been made (step C45).
Specifically, for example, when the effect control device 300 displays on the display device 41 an image or the like that prompts a plurality of pressing operations (continuous push (continuous PUSH) operation, etc.) on the effect operation unit 700, the display is performed. When the ratio of the number of times it is determined that there is an input in step C44 after the start of the display with respect to the number of times of the effect button input processing executed after the start reaches a predetermined ratio, or when the display is started After that, when the number of times it is determined that there is an input in step C44 reaches a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the validity probability has been exceeded.
In addition, the effect control device 300 determines that there is an input in step C44 when, for example, an image or the like prompting a single pressing operation (one PUSH operation, etc.) on the effect operation unit 700 is displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, it is determined that the effective probability has been exceeded unconditionally.

At step C45, when it is determined that the PUSH sensor effectiveness probability has not been exceeded (step C45; N), the effect button input processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in step C45, if it is determined that the PUSH sensor effectiveness probability has been exceeded (step C45; Y), the input result information of the PUSH sensor (effect button switch 25a) is saved (step C49), and the PUSH sensor (effect The button switch 25a) is set to be disabled (step C50), and the effect button input process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step C36 that the space touch effect is being performed (step C36; Y), it is determined whether the space touch effect is treated as a PUSH sensor (effect button switch 25a) (step C46). .
Here, the spatial touch effects include effects treated as a PUSH sensor and effects not treated as a PUSH sensor.
In an effect treated as a PUSH sensor, the effect control device 300 recognizes that an operation corresponding to a PUSH operation (pressing operation) has been performed when an operation of holding the hand over the effect operation unit 700 is detected, and performs a pressing operation. It is configured to perform control corresponding to
Further, in an effect not treated as a PUSH sensor, the effect control device 300 recognizes that an operation corresponding to a touch operation (contact operation) has been performed when a hand holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is detected. , is configured to perform control corresponding to the contact operation.

If it is determined in step C46 that the effect is not treated as a PUSH sensor (step C46; N), that is, if the hand holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is regarded as a contact operation on the effect operation unit 700, the process proceeds to step C37. do.
In this case, for example, when a finger or the like slides above the effect operation unit 700 (specifically, within the detection range of the touch sensor 29a on the upper side of the effect operation unit 700), a flick to the effect operation unit 700 is performed. It can be considered that the operation has been performed. Further, for example, when the finger or the like moves up and down multiple times above the effect operation unit 700 (specifically, when the finger or the like moves back and forth between the detection range and the outside of the detection range of the touch sensor 29a), the effect It can be considered that a plurality of touch operations are performed on the operation unit 700 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C46 that the effect is treated as a PUSH sensor (step C46; Y), that is, if the hand holding operation on the effect operation unit 700 is regarded as a pressing operation on the effect operation unit 700, the touch sensor 29a is turned on. The setting is disabled (step C47), the detection sensitivity of the touch sensor 29a is set to "normal sensitivity" (step C48), and the process proceeds to step C49.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the effect is treated as a PUSH sensor, the input is immediately performed without determining whether or not the input content has been confirmed or whether or not the validity probability has been exceeded. is determined, and the touch input is treated as a PUSH input.

[Scenario setting processing]
Next, details of the scenario setting process (step C14) in the main process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the scenario setting process, first, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step C61), and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process ( Step C62) is executed. Here, "preparing the address area" means preparing the address of the address area itself in order to read the data set in the address area in later processing.

Next, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step C63), and the scenario analysis process (step C64) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step C65), and the scenario analysis process (step C66) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step C67), and the scenario analysis process (step C68) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step C69), and the scenario analysis process (step C70) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step C71), and scenario analysis processing (step C72) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step C73), and scenario analysis processing (step C74) is executed based on this preparation.

Note that, in the case of this embodiment, there are seven scenario layers, and the scenario layer numbers range from 0 to 6. FIG. Of these seven scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls cut-in announcement characters, and scenario layer 2 is a layer that mainly controls the left pattern. Scenario Layer 3 is a layer that mainly controls the right pattern, Scenario Layer 4 is a layer that mainly controls the middle pattern, and Scenario Layer 5 is a layer that mainly controls the hold. , scenario layer 6 is a layer that mainly controls the preview character.

However, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, although the number of scenario layers is seven in this embodiment, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for backgrounds and notices varies depending on the model specifications, and in this embodiment, the description is limited to as few layers as possible. Also, the controlled objects of each scenario layer are not limited to those of the present embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the left pattern, scenario layer 2 is a layer that mainly controls the right pattern, and scenario layer 3 is A layer that mainly controls medium patterns, a scenario layer 4 that mainly controls announcement 1, a scenario layer 5 that mainly controls announcement 2, and a scenario layer 6 that mainly controls suspension. It may be a mode that it is a layer to do.

Also, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer. The address of the area is stored, and when there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL. For example, since the pending display is not performed during the customer waiting movie, an address (scenario management area 0 address) is set in the background area (scenario management area 0 address area), but the pending area NULL is set in (the address area of the scenario management area 6).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 43 shows the received command check process (step C13) in the main process described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C81). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C82). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C82; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C82; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C83).

Next, the contents of the receive command buffer are copied to the command area (step C84), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C85), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C86). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C86 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C86; N), the process returns to step C84. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C86; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C87), and received command analysis processing (step C88) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C89), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C90). Then, when it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C90; N), the process returns to step C87. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of received commands has been completed (step C90; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 44 shows received command analysis processing (step C88) in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C101), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C102). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C103).

Further, when it is determined in step C102 that MODE and ACT are not in the normal range (step C102; N), or when it is determined in step C103 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C103; N), the reception End command analysis processing.

If it is determined in step C103 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C103; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C104). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C104; Y), single-shot command processing (step C105) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C104 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C104; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C106). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C106; Y), symbolic command processing (step C107) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step C106 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C106; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of variation-based commands (step C108). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C108; Y), the variable command process (step C109) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C108 that MODE is not within the range of the variation command (step C108; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C110). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C110; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C111) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C110, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of big hit commands (step C110; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of small win commands (step C112). A small hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.) related to production during a small hit. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the small-hit command (step C112; Y), small-hit command processing (step C113) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Also, in step C112, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the small hit system command (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C114). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C114; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C115) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined at step C114 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol type command (step C114; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation type command (step C116). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C116; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C117) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C116 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C116; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, in the single-shot system command processing (step C55), when receiving the decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation (first start memory), the special figure that performs the processing related to the generated special figure 1 reservation 1 reservation information setting process and special figure 2 reservation information setting process that performs processing related to special figure 2 reservation that occurred when receiving a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to special figure 2 reservation (second start memory) included. In these special figure 1 reservation information setting processing and special figure 2 reservation information setting processing, the display device 41 or the information display device 800 displays the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the reservation that has occurred. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a starting memory notification means for performing a starting memory notification display for displaying information about the starting memory by a starting memory display corresponding to each starting memory.

In addition, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether the special figure variation display game will be a big hit when the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) of the unexecuted special figure variation display game is subsequently executed. Whether or not (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability, display the decorative special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, display This is an effect such as performing an effect display on the device 41 . Then, the look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command for informing in advance the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. is transmitted to the production control device 300 from. It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
45 and 46 show the single-shot command processing (step C105) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is RAM initialization (step C121). When it is determined that the MODE is RAM initialization (step C121; Y), the fourth pattern LED (L1, L2) is output to be turned off (step C122), and the turn off flag is set (step C123).

The light-off flag indicates that processing for outputting light-off of L1 and L2 (see FIG. 5) displaying the fourth symbol in the information display device 800 has been performed. This light-off flag is maintained in a set state while power is supplied to the effect control device 300, and is cleared along with the power shutdown of the effect control device 300, or an area to be initialized in the main process of FIG. When the initial value is set in the process of saving the initial value when the power is turned on (step C8), it is cleared.

After that, in order to set the display when the processing corresponding to power-on with RAM initialization in the game control device 100 is performed, various initial screen information settings (step C124) and power-on scenario data setting processing (Step C125) is performed. In the setting of various initial screen information, clear the special figure type and design type, and set the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number to 0. Also, "753" is set as the stop symbol. Then, the state of the P machine (the state of the pachinko machine) is set to customer waiting A (step C126), the command received flag is set (step C150), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. When it is determined that MODE is not RAM initialization (step C121; N), it is determined whether MODE is restoration from power failure (step C127).

When it is determined that the MODE is restoration from power failure (step C127; Y), the fourth pattern LED (L1, L2) is output to be turned off (step C128), and the turn off flag is set (step C129). After that, a power failure recovery setting process (step C130) for performing a process related to power failure recovery is performed, a command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the MODE is not power failure restoration (step C127; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a customer waiting demonstration (step C131).

If it is determined that the MODE is the customer waiting demonstration (step C131; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C132). If the command is not a normal command (step C132; N), the command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the single-shot command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C132; Y), it is determined whether there is a light-off flag (step C133).

If there is a light-off flag (step C133; Y), the process proceeds to step C136. If there is no light-off flag (step C133; N), the light-off of the fourth symbol LED (L1, L2) is output (step C134), and the light-off flag is set (step C135). After that, it is determined whether the state of the P machine is set to the customer waiting demonstration (step C136), and if it is already set to the customer waiting demonstration (step C136; Y), the command reception completion flag is set ( Step C150), the one-shot command processing is terminated. Also, if it is not set during the customer waiting demonstration (step C136; N), a customer waiting scenario data setting process for setting an effect in the customer waiting state is performed (step C137). Further, the P aircraft state is set to customer waiting A (step C138), the command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In step C131, when it is determined that MODE is not a customer waiting demonstration (step C131; N), as shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether MODE is within the range of special figure 1 reservation system (step C139). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the special figure 1 reservation system (step C139; Y), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (step C140) for storing information related to the reservation of special figure 1 is performed , the command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the special figure 1 reservation system (step C139; N), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the special figure 2 reservation system (step C141).

When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the special figure 2 reservation system (step C141; Y), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process (step C142) for storing information related to the reservation of special figure 2 is performed , the command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. Also, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the special figure 2 reservation system (step C141; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol stop system (step C143).

When it is determined that the MODE is in the range of the symbol stop system (step C143; Y), a symbol stop scenario data setting process for setting an effect when the symbols are stopped is performed (step C144), and the P machine state is set. Normal is set (step C145). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol stop system (step C143; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C146).

If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the probability information system (step C146; Y), a probability information setting process (step C147) is performed to perform processing such as setting of effects corresponding to the probability state, and command reception is performed. An end flag is set (step C150), and the one-shot command processing ends. If it is determined that MODE is not in the range of probability information system (step C146; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of error/fraud system (step C148).

If it is determined that the MODE is in the error/illegal range (step C148; Y), an error/illegal setting process (step C149) is performed to perform error notification processing, etc., and a command reception completion flag is set. (step C150), and the one-shot command processing ends. If it is determined that the MODE is not in the error/illegal range (step C148; N), all of the MODEs other than the above-described ones that can be set as single-shot commands are subjected to sorting determination and corresponding processing. Ends single-shot command processing.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 47 shows the variable command processing (step C109) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variation-based command process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C161). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C161; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. In addition, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C161; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, perform variation pattern corresponding symbol determination processing for checking the combination of the variation command and the symbol command (step C162 ), it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C163).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C163; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Further, when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C163; N), variation effect setting processing is performed (step C164). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, winning symbols, 16R probability variation A to F symbols, 6R probability variation symbols, 2R probability variation A and B symbols, and small winning symbols. If the variation command and the pattern type are inconsistent, it is like when you received a variation command (variation pattern command) that is out of order, but you received a pattern command with a 16R probability variation A pattern. It means that it is a combination (combination of variation command and symbol type) that is contradictory.

In the variation effect setting process (step C164), as a process for determining the variation pattern type from the variation command, the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command, and the variation command is determined. A process of setting information for performing a corresponding production is performed. Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (step C165). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Then, the command received flag is set (step C166), and the variable command processing ends.

[Jackpot command processing]
FIG. 48 shows the jackpot command processing (step C111) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is fanfare (step C171). When it is determined that the MODE is fanfare (step C171; Y), fanfare effect setting processing for setting the effect during fanfare is performed (step C172), and the state of the P aircraft is set to fanfare (step C173). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C183), and the big win system command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not fanfare (step C171; N), it is determined whether MODE is round (step C174).

When it is determined that the MODE is round (step C174; Y), round effect setting processing for setting the effect during the round is performed (step C175), and the state of the P machine is set to be during the round (step C176). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C183), and the big win system command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not round (step C174; N), it is determined whether MODE is interval (step C177).

When it is determined that the MODE is interval (step C177; Y), interval effect setting processing for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C178), and the state of the P machine is set to the interval (step C179). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C183), and the big win system command processing is terminated. If it is determined that MODE is not interval (step C177; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C180).

When it is determined that the MODE is ending (step C180; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect is performed (step C181), and the state of the P machine is changed to ending (step C182). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C183), and the big win system command processing is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the MODE is not the ending (step C177; N), the big hit system command processing is terminated.

[Small win system command processing]
FIG. 49 shows the small hit system command processing (step C113) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this small-hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a small-hit fanfare (step C201). When it is determined that the MODE is a small winning fanfare (small winning fanfare command) (step C201; Y), a small winning medium notice setting process for setting a small winning medium notice which is a look-ahead effect performed during a small winning is performed. Perform (step C202), and perform a small hit effect setting process for setting the effect up to the start of the ending of the small win game state (step C203). Then, the P machine state is set during the small hit (step C204), the command reception completion flag is set (step C208), and the small hit system command processing is terminated. Also, when it is determined that the MODE is not a small winning fanfare (step C201; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a small winning end screen (command of a small winning end screen) (step C205).

When it is determined that the MODE is the small winning end screen (step C205; Y), a small winning ending effect setting process for setting the effect at the end of the small winning is performed (step C206), and the P machine state is changed to the small winning ending. medium (step C207). Then, the command reception completion flag is set (step C208), and the small hit system command processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the MODE is not the small hit end screen (step C205; N), the small hit system command processing is terminated. In addition, in the small hit effect setting process (step C203), all the effects from the start to the end of the small win game state may be set.

[Notice setting process during small hit]
FIG. 50 shows the notice setting process (step C202) during the small hit in the above-described small hit system command process. In this small-hit advance notice setting process, first, it is determined whether the game is in a high-probability state (step C211), and if it is not in the high-probability state (step C211; N), the small-hit advance notice setting process is terminated. Moreover, when it is in the high-probability state (step C211; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a starting memory for a big hit (step C212).

If there is no starting memory for a big hit (step C212; N), it is determined whether the value of the number-of-games counter, which counts the number of games from the end of the special game state, is within a predetermined range (step C213). The number-of-games counter is cleared to 0 when a special game state occurs, and is updated by +1 when a special figure variation display game is started. The predetermined range in this determination is 50 to 62, and it is determined whether or not the small hit occurred in the 50th to 62nd game after the end of the special game state.

When the number of games counter is out of the predetermined range (step C213; N), a notice corresponding to the value of the notice counter during the small win is set (step C214), the small win notice counter is updated by +1 (step C215), and a small win is made. End the middle notice setting process. Further, when the number-of-games counter is within the predetermined range (step C213; Y), a specific notice is set (step C216), and the small winning medium notice setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a starting memory for a big hit (step C212; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit is 16R probability variable A (step C217). Then, if it is not 16R probability variation A (step C217; N), big hit notice 1 is set (step C218), and the small hit middle notice setting process is terminated. In addition, when it is 16R probability variation A (step C317; Y), big hit notice 2 is set (step C219) and small hit medium notice setting processing is ended.

FIG. 51 shows the contents of the notice during the small hit set in the notice setting process during the small hit. The content of this notice is the character's words displayed during the small winning game state. FIG. 51(a) shows the contents of the advance notice when there is a starting memory for a big hit. In the big hit notice 1 selected in the case other than 16R variable A, the line "Easy win! Easy win!" selected.

FIG. 51(b) shows the contents of the advance notice when there is no starting memory for a big hit. In the advance notice according to the advance notice counter value during the advance notice set when the small hit is not generated in the 50th to 62nd games from the end of the special game state, one of five types of lines is played according to the advance notice counter value. selected. Note that N in the appearance condition is an integer. In addition, in the specific notice set when the small win occurs in the 50th to 62nd games from the end of the special game state, the line "Don't give up!" is selected. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is maintained until the 80th game from the end of the special game state. A special line is displayed to give the player a sense of anticipation for the remaining high-probability game.

It should be noted that although the mode of selection is such that the existence of the starting memory that will result in a big win is clearly notified, it is also possible to provide an advance notice that can be selected regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory that will result in a big win. Furthermore, by providing a plurality of such advance notices and varying the selection probability according to the presence or absence of the start memory for the big win, the possibility of the existence of the start memory for the big win may differ depending on the notice. Alternatively, a case may be included in which a player is randomly selected from the notice shown in FIG. 51 regardless of the presence or absence of a big hit.

In addition, for other than 16R probability variable A, the details of the notice may differ depending on the type of big hit. Furthermore, the content of the notice may be changed according to the read-ahead information such as the occurrence of reach and the type of reach. In addition, when there are a plurality of start memories that result in a big hit when there are a plurality of start memories, it is possible to make it possible to execute an advance notice to suggest and notify that effect. In addition, it is also possible to memorize the contents of the notice executed last time, and when there is a start memory for a big hit, the same notice may be given to inform that there is a start memory for a big win.

The contents of the notice selected in this manner are set as part of the effect during the small hit in the small hit effect setting process (step C203). That is, the production control device 300 constitutes a pre-production control means capable of performing a predetermined production based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means (game control device 100).

52 to 54 show an example of the effects in the game. After the end of the special game state based on the big hit, it becomes a specific game state which is a high-probability state and a time-saving operation state. This specific game state continues from the end of the special game state until the special figure variation display game is executed 80 times. As shown in FIG. 52(a), in the specific game state, the name of the specific game state, "Peach Momo Mode", is displayed on the mode display section 901 set in the upper part of the display area of the display device 41. It is displayed in a flowing manner to notify that it is in a specific game state. In addition, in the remaining number display section 902 set below the mode display section 901, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the specific game state is displayed. Here, it is notified that 80 more special figure variation display games can be executed including the currently running special figure variation display game. In addition, the remaining number of times is updated by -1 when the special figure variation display game is stopped.

A decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is displayed in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 903 set in the center of the display area. Here, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which the left pattern (first pattern), the middle pattern (second pattern), and the right pattern (third pattern) are respectively variably displayed and then stopped to display the result mode. .

In addition, the decorative special figure starting memory display 905 corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory is displayed in the starting memory display area 904 provided at the bottom of the display area. In this starting memory display area 904, the decoration special figure starting memory display 905 corresponding to the starting memory one by one is displayed in line with the starting memory. The decoration special figure start memory display 905 at the left end corresponds to the start memory stored first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. Here, there are four starting memories in each of the first starting memory and the second starting memory, indicating that there are a total of eight starting memories. The display may be such that the first starting memory and the second starting memory can be distinguished from each other.

At the bottom of the display area and to the left of the starting memory display area 904, there is provided a changing memory display section 906 that displays information about the starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. When the special figure variation display game is started, the decoration special figure start memory display 905 corresponding to the special figure variation display game is transferred to this during variation storage display section 906 and displayed as a variation storage display 907 . By the display mode of the memory display 907 during this fluctuation, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. are suggested or notified.

In addition, in the lower part of the display area and to the left of the changing memory display part 906, a notice display part 908 for performing a notice about the special figure fluctuation display game being executed and a prefetch effect about the starting memory is provided. . Here, a character is displayed in the announcement display portion 908, and the announcement is made by the character's lines and actions. In this notice display section 908, a notice during a small hit to be executed during the small win game state is also executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), the fourth special figure variation display game is being executed from the start of the specific game state, and the result of this special figure variation display game is a small hit as shown in FIG. 52(c). In the decoration special figure variation display game, "241", which is a small hit result mode, is derived, and a small hit game state is started. At the start of this small-hit game state, a small-hit fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of this command, the aforementioned small-hit medium notice setting processing (step C202) and small-hit An effect setting process (step C203) is performed, and an effect during the small winning game state including the advance notice during the small winning is set.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 52(d), the derivation of the small-hit result may be indicated by a small-hit symbol appearing only when the small-hit result is obtained. Furthermore, this small hit pattern is a pattern related to the decoration start memory display 905 (here, a pattern imitating a peach), and it is notified that the notice during the small hit is performed in the decoration special figure start memory display. can be In addition, in the case of giving notice during a small hit, the larger the number of start memories, the higher the possibility of being able to notify the existence of the start memory for a big win, so a ready-to-win state is generated in a special figure fluctuation display game where a small win is made. By doing so, it is possible to secure time for increasing the starting memory.

The small winning game state started based on the derivation of the small winning result includes, as shown in FIG. 53, a small winning fanfare period (t1-t2), a small winning 1R (t2-t3), a small winning interval (t3-t4), It consists of a small hit 2R (t4 to t5) and a small hit ending (t5 to t6). The time of each period is as shown in the figure, and this time is the same as in the special game state based on the 2R probability variation A and B.

FIG. 54 shows an example of an advance notice during a small hit. FIGS. 54(a) to 54(c) show an example in which there is a starting memory for a big hit. When the small winning game state is started, it becomes a small winning fanfare period. During this small win fanfare period, the same display as the display when the small win is derived is maintained as shown in FIG. do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(b), a big hit announcement is made from the small win 1R to the ending. Here, since there is a starting memory of 16R probability variable A, the words "You did it!" are displayed as the jackpot announcement 2. It should be noted that the display is the same as during the small winning fanfare period except for performing the notice during the small winning, and it is shown as if the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is extended even during this period. After that, the small winning game state is ended, and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 54(c).

FIGS. 54(d) to (f) show an example in which there is no starting memory for a big hit. In this case as well, a small hit notice is given in the same way as when there is a starting memory for a big hit, but the content is different. As shown in FIG. 54(d), during the small win fanfare period, the same display as the display when the small win is derived is maintained, and the notice is given from the small win 1R to the ending as shown in FIG. 54(e). This is the 4th special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state, and the value of the notice counter during the small hit is 5N-4 (for example, 1), so the words "still more!!" are displayed. . After that, the small winning game state ends, and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 54(f). The content of the notice in this case changes according to the small hit notice counter value. Further, when a small hit is derived in the 50th to 62nd special figure variation display games after the end of the special game state, a specific notice ("Don't give up!") is given.

As described above, when a small hit occurs in a specific game state in a high probability state, a look-ahead effect is performed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. That is, at present, there are many gaming machines in which a game is played left-handed in a low-probability state or a high-probability state in the 8-holding type of special figure 1 and 2 alternate winning. In such a game machine, the special figures 1 and 2 are consumed in the winning order, and both small hits occur at a predetermined rate, specifically, the special figure 1 is configured to occur at a higher probability. Therefore, small wins occur frequently during the high-probability state, and especially immediately after the start of the high-probability state, there is a possibility of small wins occurring because the first start memory remains due to alternate winning in the prize-winning device. expensive. The small winning game state executed by winning the small winning has a low possibility of winning the big winning opening and becomes a useless "pause" for the player who is playing the game expecting the occurrence of the next big winning. put away. However, by performing the look-ahead effect in this small winning game state, new value can be given to the small winning game state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, it is also possible to execute a hold change notice that makes a notice about the corresponding start memory by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 905, and a hold change notice during the small hit game state. It is possible to carry out in parallel with the advance notice during the small hit. In particular, regarding the decoration special figure start memory display 905 in which the pending change notice is started before the start of the small winning game state, the dialogue as shown in FIG. , information about the starting memory may be notified. Also, it is possible to start the pending change notice only during the small winning game state.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the case of not being in the specific game state, the notice during the small hit as described above is not performed, but it may be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-described look-ahead effect is performed in a specific game state that is a high probability state and a time saving operation state, but in a game state in which either one of the high probability state and the time saving operation state is set Similarly, the above-described look-ahead effect may be performed. Further, in the 2R probability variation A and B, the notice similar to the notice during the small hit may be given. Furthermore, the notice similar to the notice during the small win may be made for other big win types as well. In particular, if it is performed during a short opening period, it is possible to add new value to the short opening period, which has no value for the player.

Also, the effect content of the notice during the small hit is not limited to the above. For example, the character of the notice display unit 908 may act on the decoration special figure starting memory display 905 to perform an effect of specifying the starting memory of the prefetch target. In addition, by using the variable memory display 907 corresponding to the special figure variation display game that resulted in the small hit result, the effect of specifying the starting memory to be read ahead and the display mode are changed to change the look-ahead result of the starting memory. You may make it perform the production|presentation which performs suggestion notification. Further, the effect may be performed by acting on the during-variation memory display 907 corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the character has resulted in a small hit. For example, a new character appears when the character breaks the variable memory display 907 imitating peach, and the new character acts on the decoration special figure start memory display 905 to display the look-ahead result. You can do it. In addition, when the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the small winning game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a new prefetch result is notified at the ending of the small winning game state or more details of the already notified prefetch result. It is also possible to make such notification.

From the above, based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32, a plurality of identification information are changed When a special result is derived as a result of the variable display game to be displayed, the variable winning device (special variable winning device 38) is changed from the closed state to the open state to create a special game state in which a game value can be awarded to the player. In a gaming machine provided with control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) capable of generating, the control means extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning hole, and converts the predetermined random number to A start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory, and based on the start memory stored in the start memory means, results of the variable display game are displayed before the start of the change display game. Advance determination means (game control device 100) capable of prior determination, and game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling execution of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means ), preliminary performance control means (performance control device 300) capable of performing a predetermined performance based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means, and a variable display over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state a specific game state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a specific game state in which the game is executed so as to be advantageous to the player; A second special result capable of generating one special result (big win) and a second special game state (small win game state) in which the game value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the first special game state (special game state). The specific game state generating means increases the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result in the specific game state than in the normal state, and the preliminary effect control means is the specific game state. When a second special game state occurs in the game state, it is possible to perform a predetermined performance (notice during small winning) based on the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means in the second special game state that occurs. becomes.

FIG. 55 shows an example of an effect when there is a starting memory for a small hit. In the case of giving notice during a small win, the larger the number of start memories, the higher the possibility that the existence of the start memories for a big win can be announced. Therefore, when the starting memory number is a predetermined number or less (for example, 4 or less) and there is a starting memory for a small win, the starting memory number is changed before the start of the small win game state based on the small win. The increase promotion notification for prompting the user to increase is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 55, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the starting memory number is a predetermined number or less (here, 4 or less), and there is a starting memory that becomes a small hit, and the execution condition for the increase promotion notification is established. Here, the starting memory to be digested fourth is the starting memory to be a small hit, and the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display 905 is made a display color different from the other decorative special figure starting memory display 905 for explanation. However, it is actually the same display color as the other decorative special figure start memory display 905. Of course, as a look-ahead effect in the decoration special figure starting memory display 905, the display mode may be changed such as changing the display color in this way and making the display such that the decoration special figure starting memory display 903 shakes.

In the increase promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the decorative special figure variation display game display section 903 is retracted from the center of the display area, and the possibility that a small hit announcement may be made in the center of the display area is indicated. A notification display (here, display of "premonition of pending open time...") is performed. Furthermore, in the starting memory display area 904, a display instructing to generate a starting memory (in this case, a display of "Save hold!") is performed.

After that, when a new special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 55(c), the number of games until the notice during the small winning is performed is notified. This notification is updated each time the special figure variation display game is executed, as shown in FIGS. 55(d) and (e). Further, when a start memory is generated and the number of start memories reaches the upper limit value as shown in FIG. Then, when the small winning result is derived as shown in FIG. 55(f), the small winning game state is started and the advance notice during the small winning is performed.

FIG. 56 shows another example of the advance notice during the small hit. As shown in FIG. 56(a), in this small-hit middle notice, a display is made to notify that the small-hit middle notice will be performed during the small-hit fanfare period, and as shown in FIG. In the winning interval, advance notice is given for the starting memory of the 1st to 4th in the order of completion. In this notice, the display that predicts the reliability, which is the high probability that the corresponding start memory will be a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern, etc., is displayed. For example, it is reported that the reliability, which is the high probability of winning a big hit, is 5% for the starting memory that is the first in the order of completion.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the small winning ending from the small winning 2R, the starting memory of the 5th to 8th in the order of completion is similarly announced. Here, the advance notice is divided into two groups, the first half and the second half, according to the digestion order of the starting memory, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the announcement may be made at random regardless of digestion.

As shown in FIG. 56(d), in the special figure variation display game after the end of the small winning game state, the advance notice during the small winning is maintained as it is. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game after the end of the small winning game state, the decoration special figure start memory display 905 in which the notice content was not displayed in the notice during the small win It may be possible to make a notice about the decoration special figure start memory display 905) of about, or to change the notice contents made in the notice during the small hit.

FIG. 57 also shows another example of the advance notice during the small hit. As shown in FIG. 57(a), in this small hit medium notice, a display showing the correspondence between the operation point of the effect operating section 700 and the decoration special figure starting memory display 905 defined by the starting memory is made in the display area. And, the advance notice is made by the decoration special figure starting memory display 905 corresponding to the operation point touched by the player.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), if you touch the effect operation unit 700 to draw a circle, all of the operation points corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display will be touch operated, and all the decoration special figure start A notice will be given for the memory display. Also, as shown in FIG. 57(c), it is possible to perform a contact operation on an individual operation point. Further, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the decoration special figure starting memory display 905 which is highly likely to be announced with a high degree of expectation may be displayed so as to sway to prompt selection.

It should be noted that the number of decoration special figure starting memory display that can be selected by the player may be limited to a predetermined number or less. The predetermined number in this case may always be constant, or may vary. If it fluctuates, it may fluctuate randomly, or it may fluctuate according to the result of the game, such as the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed from a certain point, the number of small hits, the number of times a specific effect occurs, etc. You can make it work.

FIG. 58 also shows another example of the advance notice during the small hit. In this small winning notice, a sub-display device 910 provided separately from the display device 41 is also used. The sub-display device 910 can be converted into a state of being positioned below the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 58(a) and a state of being positioned in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 58(b). . In the state shown in FIG. 58(a), the sub-display device 910 is positioned behind the game area 32. This portion of the game board 30 is made of a transparent member, and the player can see the sub-display device 910. is visible. Further, the sub-display device 910 is rotatable around an axis along the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. 58(c).

As shown in FIG. 58(a), at the stage before the start of the small winning game state, the sub display device 910 displays a display suggesting that a notice during the small winning will be performed, and causes the sub display device 910 to vibrate. works. In addition, the decoration special figure start memory display is also displayed so as to tremble. Such an operation and display may be performed even when the advance notice during the small winning is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the small hit game state is started, the sub-display device 910 moves to the front of the display device 41, and the decorative special figure start storage display 905 moves to the sub-display device 910. display as if being swallowed by At this time, the total value of the first starting memory number and the second starting memory number is displayed in the starting memory display area 904 (here, 8). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the sub-display device 910 is rotated, and as shown in FIG. indicate. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the decorative special figure starting memory display returned to the original position of the display device 41, a notice about the corresponding starting memory is displayed.

FIG. 59 shows an arrangement example of the sub display device 910 . The sub-display device 910 can be arranged at any position, and a plurality of sub-display devices may be arranged instead of one. In addition, in the case where the state of being positioned in front of the display device 41 and the state of being partially or wholly retracted from the front of the display device 41 can be converted, the corresponding portions of the game board are made of transparent members. , the display of the sub-display device 910 is preferably made visible.

Next, a description will be given of a screen shot function that allows an image displayed on the display device 41 to be captured and saved by a player's operation, and a gaming machine setting change based on a game store clerk's or player's operation. In recent years, there has been an increase in the number of players who take pictures of special effects (premium effects, etc.) that occur during games with a mobile phone camera. It is very difficult to photograph the effect caused by this, and there is a problem that the photographed image may be out of focus or light may enter due to decorative lamps or the like, making it difficult to photograph well. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect displayed during the game is saved so that it can be displayed at a timing when the player can concentrate on shooting, such as when the game ends, so that the player can calmly and reliably shoot the desired image. It has a screenshot function that allows you to

FIG. 60 shows an example of image storage. As shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(e), an effect is progressing on the display device 41. FIG. Then, when the player wants to save the image of FIG. 60(e), the screen shot operation (here, a flick operation in the forward direction) is performed on the effect operation section 700 at the timing when this image is displayed. Based on this screenshot operation, a sound simulating the shutter sound of a camera is output, and the image at that time is saved. Also, when the image is saved, a confirmation display 911 is performed to display the saved image for a predetermined time at a predetermined location (here, the upper left portion) of the display area as shown in FIG. 60(f). It should be noted that a voice notifying that the data has been saved may be output in accordance with the start of the confirmation display 911 . Also, the confirmation display 911 may temporarily display an image when the screen shot operation is performed, and the image may be saved when the player performs an operation indicating that the screen shot is to be saved.

The operation mode of the screen shot operation for saving the image is different from the operation mode of the effect operation unit 700 required in the effect, and the scene where the operation of the effect operation unit 700 is required in the effect. Even if it is, the image can be reliably saved. That is, the effect operation unit 700 in the present embodiment and the push buttons provided in the game machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-158493 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-311961 can be used by the player at various timings of the effect in the game. It is possible to intervene in the production by accepting the operation of However, if it is possible to save an image by operating the effect operation unit 700, and if it is desired to save the image at a timing when it is possible to intervene in the effect by operating the effect operation unit 700, the effect operation is performed to save the image. By operating the part 700, there is a risk of unintentionally intervening in the production. Therefore, by making the operation mode (first operation) for intervening in the performance and the operation mode (second operation) for the screen shot operation for saving the image different, the operation intended by the player can be performed. Images at any timing can be saved, and the player can be further entertained.

Images saved in this way can be displayed in the customer waiting state. FIG. 61 shows an example of display of saved images. As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the special figure variation display game ends with a losing result in a state where there is no starting memory, the customer waits. By pressing the effect operation unit 700 in this customer waiting state, it is possible to set the game machine and display a saved image. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration effect that displays various images is started. An explanatory display explaining that various settings can be performed by operating the screen 700 is included.

When the effect operation unit 700 is pressed during the customer waiting state, the player setting mode is entered, and the screen of the player setting mode shown in FIG. 61(c) is displayed. On the screen of the player setting mode, items of volume setting and brightness setting for adjusting the brightness of LEDs used for decoration are displayed as items that can be set. These items show the current settings. Also displays screen shot setting items for displaying saved images, items for exiting player setting mode and returning to the customer waiting demo, and explanations of operations on the player setting mode screen. be done.

The currently selected item is indicated by a highlighting cursor surrounding the item, here the cursor is positioned in the Screenshot Settings item. This cursor moves upward by performing a movement operation to touch the operation point on the front side with respect to the center of the effect operation unit 700, and moves downward by performing a movement operation to touch the operation point on the rear side with respect to the center. Move to Then, by performing a decision operation that touches the central operation point of the effect operation section 700, the setting of the item on which the cursor is positioned is proceeded.

As shown in FIG. 61(c), when the cursor is positioned on the screen shot setting item and a determination operation is performed by touching the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700, a screen as shown in FIG. 61(d) is displayed. A reduced screen display that displays a list of saved images is displayed. In this reduced screen display, the cursor moves up, down, left, and right in accordance with a movement operation that touches the front, rear, left, and right operation points with respect to the center of the effect operation unit 700. For example, a movement operation that touches the right operation point is performed. , the cursor moves to the right as shown in FIG. 61(e).

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(e), the cursor is moved to the desired image, and by performing the determination operation of touching the central operation point of the effect operation section 700, the cursor is positioned as shown in FIG. 61(f). A full-screen display is displayed in which only the image that was being displayed is displayed. In the full-screen display, only the selected image is displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and no other decorative display or the like is performed. Also, the LEDs of the game board 30, the front frame 12, and the glass frame 15 are turned off to make the state suitable for photographing by the camera. In the state where the full-screen display is being performed, performing the determination operation again by touching the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700 returns to the reduced-screen display. In the reduced screen display at this time, the cursor is positioned on the image displayed in the full screen display.

On the screen shown in FIG. 61(c), when the cursor is positioned on the item for volume setting or LED brightness setting used for decoration, the item can be set. In this setting, the value decreases according to the operation of touching the left operation point with respect to the center of the effect operation unit 700, and the value increases according to the operation of touching the right operation point.

FIG. 62 shows an example of the setting of the game machine by the operation of the store clerk of the game parlor. When the effect operation unit 700 is pressed twice while the customer is waiting and the front frame 12 is opened, the hole setting mode is entered, and the hole setting mode screen shown in FIG. 62(a) is displayed. Items that can be set on the hall setting mode screen include a volume setting that sets the range in which the volume can be changed in the player setting mode, and a change in the brightness of the LED used for decoration in the player setting mode. Items of LED luminance setting for setting the range to be displayed, and demonstration effect setting items for setting whether or not to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect and the contents thereof are displayed. Further, items of liquid crystal luminance setting for setting the luminance of the display device 41, power saving setting for setting the presence/absence of the power saving mode, and logo color setting for setting the display color of the logo are displayed. These items show the current settings. In addition, items for factory settings to return to the factory settings, items for ending the hole setting mode, and explanations of operations on the hole setting mode screen are also displayed.

The currently selected item is indicated by a cursor that highlights the item so as to enclose it. Here, the cursor is positioned on the item of demonstration effect setting, indicating that OFF is selected. ing. OFF is a setting in which the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed in the customer waiting state, and ON is a setting in which the customer waiting demo effect is performed in the customer waiting state. The setting can be changed by performing a movement operation to touch the left and right operation points of the operation unit 700 .

In addition, in the customer-waiting demonstration effect, no sound is set to be output, but it may be possible to select whether or not to output the sound. If the setting is to output sound, the sound is output at the volume set in the volume setting. Of course, the volume of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be separately set. Also, based on the information of the RTC 338, the presence or absence of sound and the volume may be set according to the date and time. For example, it may be possible to set so as to permit the output of the sound in the customer waiting demonstration effect only for a predetermined period after the opening of the store.

That is, in the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demonstration effect (game explanation, effect content explanation, character movement, voice output, etc.) is executed, but these effects may interfere with other players' games. However, there is a problem that some players and amusement arcades feel very uncomfortable because it becomes noisy even when it is not in operation, but it is possible to set the presence or absence and volume of the sound of the customer waiting demo effect. By doing so, such problems can be solved.

Further, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is set to ON, by performing a decision operation to touch the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700 while the cursor is positioned on the demonstration effect setting item, The content of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), each item of customer waiting A, customer waiting B, movie, and game introduction can be selected whether or not to be executed as a customer waiting demo effect. By moving the cursor by a moving operation of touching the operation point and performing an operation of touching the central operation point of the effect operation unit 700, it is possible to switch whether to execute the item. Furthermore, the presence or absence of sound volume and sound may be set for each item of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Next, a screen shot function that allows the image displayed on the display device 41 as described above to be captured and saved by the operation of the player, and changes in the settings of the gaming machine based on the operations of the store clerk or the player. Therefore, the processing performed by the effect control device 300 will be described.

[Screenshot processing]
FIG. 63 shows the screenshot processing (step C10) in the main processing described above. In this screenshot processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a screenshot operation (step C251), and if there is no screenshot operation (step C251; N), the screenshot processing ends. If there is a screen shot operation (step C251; Y), the display data in the current frame buffer is copied (step C252) and saved in the screen shot storage area corresponding to the index counter (step C253). Processing for displaying the saved image as a confirmation display 911 in a part of the display area of the display device 41 for a predetermined period is also performed.

After that, the index counter is updated by +1 (step C254), and it is determined whether the index counter has become larger than 14 as a result of the update (step C255). If it is not greater than 14 (step C255; N), the screen shot process is terminated. If it is greater than 14 (step C255; Y), the value of the index counter is set to 0 (step C256), and the screen shot process ends.

Here, images can be stored in 15 storage areas of index counters 0 to 14, and up to 15 images can be stored. When 15 images have already been saved, the storage area storing the oldest image is overwritten and saved. Of course, if 15 images have already been saved, the player may be allowed to select an image to be deleted. Alternatively, unnecessary images may be selected in advance in the reduced screen display shown in FIG. 61(d), and when a new image is to be saved, the selected image may be sequentially overwritten. Alternatively, the image when the screen shot operation is performed may be displayed once on the display device 41, and may be saved when an operation indicating that it is to be saved is performed.

That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an input reception means for receiving an operation input of an operation means (effect operation unit 700) that can be operated by the player, and based on the operation input by the input reception means, there is an operation input. It constitutes effect image storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information relating to the effect display image displayed on the effect display device (display device 41) at the same timing.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
FIG. 64 shows the hole/player setting mode process (step C11) in the main process described above. In the hole/player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the game hall is in the hole setting mode in which information is set (step C301). Note that a hole setting mode flag is set when the hole setting mode is being performed, and it is possible to determine whether the hole setting mode is being performed based on the presence or absence of this flag. If the hole setting mode is in progress (step C301; Y), the process proceeds to step C306. If not in the hole setting mode (step C301; N), it is determined whether the player is in the player setting mode in which information is set by the player (step C302).

When the player setting mode is in effect, the player setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the player setting mode is in progress based on the presence or absence of this flag. If it is in the player setting mode (step C302; Y), the process proceeds to step C320. If the player setting mode is not in progress (step C302; N), it is determined whether the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are met (step C303). Here, the condition for starting the hole setting mode is, for example, that the effect operation section 700 is pressed twice while the customer is waiting and the front frame 12 is open. If the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are met (step C303; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C304), and the hole setting mode flag is set (step C305).

After that, hall sound volume adjustment processing (step C306) for setting the changeable range of volume based on operation input, and hall LED brightness adjustment processing (step C307) for setting the changeable range for LED brightness based on operation input are performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Further, a hall demonstration effect setting process (step C308) for setting a customer waiting demo effect, a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C309) for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on an operation input, and a transition when a game has not been played for a predetermined time. A power saving setting process (step C310) is performed to set the power saving state based on the operation input. In this power saving setting process (step C310), it is set whether or not the power saving setting is enabled when the game is not played for a predetermined time, and the volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness at the time of the power saving setting are set for each hole. can be set to In addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input for confirming the information set by these processes (step C311).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C311; N), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated. Also, if there is a setting confirming operation input (step C311; Y), it is determined whether the confirming operation input is the factory setting (step C312). The confirmation operation input includes confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processing from steps C306 to C310 and confirmation operation input for resetting to factory settings, and it is determined which one has been performed.

If the operation input is not the confirmation operation input in the factory settings (step C312; N), that is, if the operation input is a confirmation operation for confirming the information set in the processing from steps C306 to C310, the processing from steps C306 to C310 is performed. The information set in step C314 is written in the backup RAM as determined information. In addition, if the operation input is to confirm the factory settings (step C312; Y), the factory settings are processed (step C313), the information set in steps C306 to C310 is discarded, and the factory settings are reset. The initial value at the time of shipment is used as determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written in the backup RAM (step C314). As a result, the initial setting values (setting values for volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323 . After that, the screen drawing end of the hole setting mode is set (step C315), the hole setting mode flag is cleared (step C316), and the hole/player setting mode processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are not satisfied (step C303; N), it is determined whether the conditions for starting the player setting mode are satisfied (step C317). The condition for starting the hole setting mode here is, for example, that the effect operation unit 700 is pressed once during the customer waiting state in which the special figure variation display game is not executed. If the condition for starting the player setting mode is not satisfied (step C317; N), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated. If the condition for starting the player setting mode is satisfied (step C317; Y), the screen drawing start of the player setting mode is set (step C318), and the player setting mode flag is set (step C319).

Then, the player volume adjustment processing (step C320) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment processing (step C306), the change set in the hall LED adjustment processing (step C307) A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C321) is performed to change the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the possible range. Further, a screen shot setting process is performed to process the image saved by the screen shot operation (step C322). After that, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirming operation input (step C323), and if there is no setting confirming operation input (step C323: N), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

Also, if there is a setting confirming operation input (step C323: Y), after the information set in steps C320 and C321 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set. Then (step C324), the player setting mode flag is cleared (step C325), and the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

Note that the drawing update setting associated with the operation input after entering the hole setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C9). Also, although the player setting data is stored in the RAM 322, it may be stored in the FeRAM 323 as well. Further, the time is obtained from the RTC 338 when the power is cut off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power cut-off time is calculated from the time obtained from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on, and the player setting data is stored in the FeRAM 323 according to the power cut-off time. may determine whether or not to store the hole set value data. For example, if the power cut-off time is within a predetermined time, the hall set value data is not stored in the player setting data and is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short-term power failure or error. , it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Hall demonstration effect setting processing]
FIG. 65 shows the hall demonstration effect setting process (step C308) in the above-described hall/player setting mode process. In this hall demonstration effect setting process, it is first determined whether or not the hall demonstration effect setting mode is active (step C331). Active is a state in which the cursor is positioned on the demonstration effect setting item on the hole setting mode screen shown in FIG. 62(a) and the setting can be changed.

If the hall demonstration effect setting mode is not active (step C331; N), the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the hall demonstration effect setting mode is active (step C331; Y), it is determined whether or not there is left/right operation of the cursor (step C332). If there is no cursor left/right operation (step C332; N), the process proceeds to step C337. Also, if there is a left/right operation of the cursor (step C332; Y), the demonstration effect setting is updated corresponding to the operation direction (step C333). That is, the demonstration effect setting is switched between ON (executing the customer waiting demonstration effect) and OFF (not executing the customer waiting demo effect).

Next, in order to make the display of the hall setting mode screen correspond to the demonstration effect setting, the display setting corresponding to the demonstration effect setting is performed (step C334), the output of the demonstration effect setting is requested (step C335), and the demonstration effect is performed. An initial value is set in the setting valid timer (step C336). The demonstration effect setting valid timer is for counting a predetermined time for fixing the current selection state even if no decision operation is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a vertical cursor operation (step C337), and if there is no vertical operation (step C337; N), the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. If there is a vertical operation (step C337; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched to active (step C338). After that, the display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C339), and the hall demonstration effect setting process is terminated. Here, when the cursor is moved up, the LED brightness setting item is activated, and when the cursor is moved down, the liquid crystal brightness setting item is activated.

[Player Volume Adjustment Processing]
FIG. 66 shows the player sound volume adjustment process (step C320) in the hall/player setting mode process described above. In this player volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player volume adjustment mode is active (step C351). Active means that the cursor is positioned on the volume setting item on the screen of the player setting mode shown in FIG. 61(c) and the setting can be changed.

If the player volume adjustment mode is not active (step C351; N), the player volume adjustment process is terminated. Also, if the player volume adjustment mode is active (step C351; Y), it is determined whether or not the cursor has been moved left or right (step C352). If there is no cursor left/right operation (step C352; N), the process proceeds to step C357. If the cursor is operated left or right (step C352; Y), the player volume value is updated within the effective range in correspondence with the operation direction (step C353). The effective range is set in the volume setting in the hall setting mode, and the player can adjust the volume within this range.

Next, in order to make the display of the player setting mode screen correspond to the player's volume value, the display setting corresponding to the player's volume value is performed (step C354), and the output of the volume switching sound is requested (step C355). , the initial value is set to the player sound volume effective timer (step C356). The player volume effective timer counts a predetermined time for fixing the current selection state even if no decision operation is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a vertical cursor operation (step C357), and if there is no vertical operation (step C357; N), the player volume adjustment processing is terminated. If there is a vertical operation (step C357; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched active (step C358). After that, the display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C359), and the player volume adjustment process is terminated. Here, when the cursor is moved up, the item for selecting the end of the player setting mode is activated, and when the cursor is moved down, the brightness setting item for adjusting the brightness of the LED is activated.

[Player LED brightness adjustment process]
FIG. 67 shows the player LED brightness/volume adjustment process (step C321) in the above-described hall/player setting mode process. In this player LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player LED brightness adjustment mode is active (step C371). Active means that the cursor is positioned on the brightness setting item on the screen of the player setting mode shown in FIG. 61(c) and the setting can be changed.

If the player LED brightness adjustment mode is not active (step C371; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. Also, when the player LED brightness adjustment mode is active (step C371; Y), it is determined whether or not the cursor is operated left or right (step C372). If there is no cursor left/right operation (step C372; N), the process proceeds to step C376. If the cursor is operated left or right (step C372; Y), the player LED brightness setting value is updated within the effective range in correspondence with the operation direction (step C373). The effective range is set in the LED brightness setting in the hole setting mode, and the player can adjust the LED brightness within this range.

Next, in order to make the display of the screen in the player setting mode correspond to the player's LED brightness setting value, the display setting corresponding to the player's LED brightness setting value is performed (step C374), and the player's LED brightness setting valid timer is set. An initial value is set (step C375). The player's LED brightness setting valid timer is for counting a predetermined time for fixing the current selection state without any decision operation.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an up/down operation of the cursor (step C376), and if there is no up/down operation (step C376; N), the player's LED luminance adjustment processing is terminated. If there is a vertical operation (step C376; Y), the item corresponding to the cursor operation is switched active (step C377). After that, the display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C378), and the player volume adjustment process is terminated. Here, when the cursor is moved up, the volume setting item is activated, and when the cursor is moved down, the screen shot setting item is activated.

[Screenshot setting process]
FIG. 68 shows the screen shot setting process (step C322) in the hole/player setting mode process described above. In this screen shot setting process, first, it is determined whether the screen shot setting mode is active (step C401). Active refers to a state in which the cursor is positioned on the screen shot setting item on the screen of the player setting mode shown in FIG. or full-screen display.

If the screenshot setting mode is not active (step C401; N), the screenshot setting process is terminated. Also, if the screen shot setting mode is active (step C401; Y), it is determined whether the transition to the setting mode has been completed (step C402). The setting mode is a state in which reduced screen display or full screen display is performed as shown in FIGS. 61(d) to (e).

If the transition to the setting mode has not been completed (step C402; N), that is, if the cursor is positioned at the screen shot setting item on the screen of the player setting mode shown in FIG. (step C403). If there is a decision operation (step C403; Y), the reduced screen display is set (step C404), and the screen shot setting process ends. Also, if there is no determination operation (step C403; N), it is determined whether there is a cursor up/down operation (step C405).

Then, if there is no cursor up/down operation (step C405; N), the screen shot setting process ends. If there is a vertical operation (step C405; Y), the screen shot setting mode is set to inactive (step C406), and the setting corresponding to the cursor position is set to active (step C407). Here, when the cursor is moved up, the brightness setting item is activated, and when the cursor is moved down, the item for selecting termination of the player setting mode is activated. After that, the display setting corresponding to the active menu is performed (step C408), and the screen shot setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the transition to the setting mode has been completed (step C402; Y), that is, if the reduced screen display or full screen display is being performed as shown in FIGS. 61(d) to (e), It is determined whether or not there is a cursor movement operation (step C409). If there is no cursor movement operation (step C409; N), the process proceeds to step C413. In the case of full-screen display, the cursor movement operation is not set, so the process proceeds to step C413 in this case as well.

If there is a cursor movement operation (step C409; Y), the selection cursor is moved in accordance with the operation direction (step C410), and the display setting corresponding to the moved selection cursor is performed (step C411). Then, it requests the output of the selection cursor movement sound (step C412), and determines whether there is a decision operation (step C413).

If there is no decision operation (step C413; N), the screen shot setting process is terminated. Also, if there is a decision operation (step C413; Y), it is determined whether the full screen is being displayed (step C414). Then, if the full screen is being displayed (step C414; Y), set the reduced screen display (step C419), set the selection cursor to the position of the image displayed in full screen (step C420), End the screenshot setting process.

On the other hand, if the full screen is not displayed (step C414; N), that is, if the reduced screen is displayed, it is determined whether the selection cursor is at the "return" position (step C415). If so (step C415; Y), the customer waiting display setting is performed (step C417), the screen shot setting mode is set to inactive (step C418), and the screen shot setting process ends. This ends the player setting mode. If the position of the selection cursor is not the "return" position (step C415; N), the image corresponding to the position of the selection cursor is set to full screen display (step C416), and the screen shot setting process ends.

That is, the effect control device 300 displays the effect display image on the effect display device (display device 41) based on the information regarding the effect display image stored in the effect image storage means (the effect control device 300) at a predetermined timing. It constitutes effect image display means capable of Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a display image selection means capable of selecting an effect display image to be enlarged and displayed on the effect display device from among the effect display images displayed by the effect image display means. Also, the effect control device 300 serves as enlargement display means capable of enlarging and displaying the effect display image selected by the display image selection means on the effect display device.

It should be noted that it is also possible to set the initial value of the screenshot setting valid timer when shifting to reduced screen display or full screen display, and terminate the player setting mode when there is no operation for a predetermined period of time. .

Also, in the above description, the image at the time of performing the screenshot operation is saved, but it is considered that such screenshots are often performed in cases where the possibility of appearing is low. Therefore, an image at the timing assumed to take a screenshot is stored in advance, and the timing closest to the timing at which the screenshot operation is performed among the images at each timing stored as described above. You may make it preserve|save the image of . For example, as shown in FIG. 60, if characters appear one by one, images are stored in advance each time the number of characters increases, and the stored images are displayed according to the timing of the screen shot operation. be saved.

Also, the saved image may be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine by the screen shot operation so that the player can obtain it with a portable terminal or the like. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with a clearer image than when the player takes a picture with a camera. Also, the saved image may be set as a background image during play. Further, during a game, a customer waiting state, or the like, the saved images may be sequentially displayed on a part of the display area of the display device 41, the sub-display device 910, or the like. Further, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the state of waiting for customers, all the stored images may be cleared.

Also, not only images but also moving images may be saved. In addition to images, the state of the entire game machine, such as the state of possible accessories when a screen shot operation is performed, the lighting state of the decoration LED and the effect operation section 700, etc., is saved, and these states saved in later operations are saved. You may make it reproduce.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of giving a game value to a player when the execution result of the game becomes a predetermined special result, an effect display device (display device) capable of performing a game-related effect display device 41), control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect display device, operation means (effect operation unit 700) operable by the player, and operation input of the operation means. A plurality of pieces of information regarding the effect display image displayed on the effect display device at the timing when the operation input is received can be stored based on the input reception means (effect control device 300) that receives and the operation input by the input reception means. It is possible to display the effect display image on the effect display device based on the effect image storage means (effect control device 300) and the information on the effect display image stored in the effect image storage means at a predetermined timing. Effect image display means (effect control device 300); and display image selection means (effect A control device 300) and an enlargement display means (effect control device 300) capable of enlarging and displaying the effect display image selected by the display image selection means on the effect display device.

Further, the operation by the operation means includes a first operation that can intervene in the effect display related to the game executed on the effect display device by performing an operation during a predetermined operation effective period; can be operated at any timing, and includes a second operation (screenshot operation) for storing information about the effect display image in the effect image storage means, the first operation and the second operation being the operation The mode will be different.

Next, the display mode of the information display device 800 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 69 shows changes in the display mode as the game progresses. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are configured to be executed in the order of occurrence of the start memories, but the explanation in FIG. 69 is simplified. Therefore, the case where the first special figure variation display game is continuously executed without the second starting memory will be described.

Here, the first start memory (special figure 1 pending) exists while the special figure variation display game is not being executed, and the first special figure variation display game is started based on this start memory (t11 ). Based on this, the special figure 1 indicator 51 starts a variable display that blinks at a period of 100 ms. Also, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) that displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game on the information display device 800 starts the variation display that blinks at a cycle of 100 ms. In addition, the first to third symbols for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game (decoration special figure 1) corresponding to the first special figure variation display game on the display device 41 also start the variation display. Also, with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the first start memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) becomes 0, and the special figure 1 reservation display LEDs 1 (L3) and 2 (L4) are turned off.

In addition, the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) for displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game on the information display device 800 is the result mode of the previous second special figure variation display game. is still displayed. Also, special figure 2 pending display LED1 (L5) and 2 (L6) has a display mode corresponding to the second start memory number (special figure 2 pending number).

And, during the execution of this first special figure variation display game, the first starting memory is generated (t12), along with this, the first starting memory number becomes 1, and the special figure 1 pending display LED 1 is lit. . After that, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the result is derived (t13), the variation display is stopped on the special figure 1 indicator 41 and the result mode of the loss is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED is turned off indicating the result of the loss, and the first to third symbols of the display device 41 also stop in the mode of the result of loss.

At this time, the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off regardless of the number of first starting memories. In addition, regardless of the number of second starting memory, the special figure 2 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to determine what kind of content each LED of the information display device 800 indicates. In particular, it is difficult to understand the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 pending display LEDs 1 and 2, so it is not possible to easily grasp the number of starting memories, and it is possible to prevent stopping due to an increase in the number of starting memories.

After that, when the first special figure variation display game based on the first start memory is started (t14), the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED, the first to third symbols of the display device 41 Variable display is started. In addition, the display of the number of starting memories in the special figure 1 reserved display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 reserved display LEDs 1 and 2 is also started. Here, since the first start memory number is 0, both the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 remain in the off state.

During the execution of this first special figure variation display game, the first start memory is generated (t15), the number of first start memories becomes 1, and the special figure 1 pending display LED 1 is lit. Furthermore, when the first start memory occurs, the number of first start memories becomes 2 (t16), and the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are lit. Furthermore, when the first start memory occurs, the first start memory number becomes 3 (t17), the special figure 1 pending display LED1 blinks at a period of 128 ms, and the special figure 1 pending display LED2 remains lit.

Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends and the losing result is derived (t18), the variation display is stopped on the special figure 1 indicator 41 and the result mode of losing is displayed, and the special figure is displayed. The 1st fourth symbol LED is turned off to indicate the result of the loss, and the first to third symbols on the display device 41 also stop in the mode of the result of the loss. In addition, the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are also turned off.

After that, when the first special figure variation display game based on the first start memory is started (t19), the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED, the first to third symbols of the display device 41 Variable display is started. In addition, the display of the number of starting memories in the special figure 1 reserved display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 reserved display LEDs 1 and 2 is also started. Here, since the first start memory number is 2, the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are both lit.

In addition, when all the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 are turned off due to the stop of the variable display (t13, t18), the next special figure variable display game is started and started A predetermined time before the timing (t14, t19) when the memory decreases, restart the display of the number of starting memories in the special figure 1 pending display LEDs 1 and 2 and the special figure 2 pending display LEDs 1 and 2, and start the special figure fluctuation display game It may be made possible to recognize that the starting memory number has decreased with time.

70 and 71 show display modes of the display device 41, the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the information display device 800. FIG. 70 and 71, an example in which the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are alternately executed will be described. Also, here, in the decorative special figure start memory display 905 displayed on the display device 41, the first start memory is displayed with a pattern imitating a flag, and the second start memory is displayed with a pattern imitating a peach. I have to.

The state shown in FIG. 70(a) is a state in which the second special figure variation display game is being executed with two first starting memories and two second starting memories. At this time, in the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game is executed in which the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 903 variably displays the first to third symbols. In addition, in the starting memory display area 904, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to each starting memory is displayed, and in the changing memory display part 906, the starting memory corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game currently being executed is changing. It is displayed as storage display 907 .

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 maintains the state of displaying the result of the previous first special figure variation display game, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 is a blinking variation display. Furthermore, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) for executing the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game is the previous first special figure variation display game. The special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2), which maintains the state of displaying the result and executes the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game, is a blinking variation display. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved LEDs 1 and 2 (L3, L4) that display the number of first starting memories are both lit to indicate that there are two first starting memories, and the number of second starting memories is displayed. Both of the pending LEDs 1 and 2 (L5 and L6) in FIG. 2 are lit to indicate that there are two second starting memories.

After that, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game being executed ends, the first to third symbols on the display device 41 show the result mode (here, the result of losing) as shown in FIG. 70(b). It displays and stops, and the special figure 2 display 52 also displays the result mode (here, the deviation result) and stops. Furthermore, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) maintains the state in which the result of the previous first special figure variation display game is displayed, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) , display the result mode (here, the failure result) and stop. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved LEDs 1 and 2 (L3, L4) that display the first start memory number and the special figure 2 reservation LEDs 1 and 2 (L5, L6) that display the second start memory number are all of them are turned off.

After a predetermined stop time has elapsed, the first special figure variation display game based on the first starting memory, which is the first in the order of completion, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the variable display of the first to third symbols is started on the display device 41, and the display of the start memory display area 904 and the memory display portion 906 during the change is updated. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 starts blinking variation display, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 maintains the state of displaying the result of the previous second special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) starts a variable display that blinks, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) shows the result of the previous second special figure variation display game. Keep the displayed state.

In addition, the special figure 1 reserved LED 1, 2 (L3, L4) that displays the first start memory number and the special figure 2 reservation LED 1, 2 (L5, L6) that displays the second start memory number display the number of start memories to start. Here, the special figure 1 pending LEDs 1 and 2 (L3, L4) indicate that only L3 is lit and there is one first start memory, and the special figure 2 pending LEDs 1 and 2 (L5, L6) are both lit It will be in a state indicating that there are two second start memories.

Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game being executed ends, the first to third symbols on the display device 41 show the result mode (here, the result of losing) as shown in FIG. 71(a). It displays and stops, and the special figure 1 display 51 also displays the result mode (here, the deviation result) and stops. Furthermore, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) is stopped by displaying the result mode (here, the result of losing), and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is the last time The state in which the result of the second special figure variation display game is displayed is maintained. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved LEDs 1 and 2 (L3, L4) that display the first start memory number and the special figure 2 reservation LEDs 1 and 2 (L5, L6) that display the second start memory number are all of them are turned off.

After a predetermined stop time has passed, the second special figure variation display game based on the second starting memory, which is the first in the order of completion, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 71(b), on the display device 41, the variable display of the first to third patterns is started, and the display of the start memory display area 904 and the memory display portion 906 during the change is updated. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 maintains the state of displaying the result of the previous first special figure variation display game, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 starts blinking variation display. Furthermore, in the information display device 800, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) maintains the state in which the result of the previous first special figure variation display game is displayed, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) flashes. start the variable display.

In addition, the special figure 1 reserved LED 1, 2 (L3, L4) that displays the first start memory number and the special figure 2 reservation LED 1, 2 (L5, L6) that displays the second start memory number display the number of start memories to start. Here, the special figure 1 pending LED 1, 2 (L3, L4) indicates that only L3 is lit and there is one first start memory, and the special figure 2 pending LED 1, 2 (L5, L6) is lit only L5 It will be in a state indicating that there is one second start memory.

Next, the lighting mode of the information display device 800 when the gaming machine is turned on with the processing of clearing the RAM 111C of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 72 shows the light emission mode of the information display device 800 and the light emission mode of the decorative LEDs provided on the game board 30 and the front frame 12 when the gaming machine is powered on.

10 and 11 is started in the game control device 100, and the main processing shown in FIG. 40 is started in the effect control device 300. is started.
In the effect control device 300, so as to perform the process of outputting the lighting of the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) before performing the process of step C7 in the main process It is designed to be able to visually confirm whether the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) operate normally. At this time, all the decoration LEDs are turned off, so only the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) are lit, making the confirmation work easy. It should be noted that the special figure 1 pending LED 1, 2 (L3, L4) and the special figure 2 pending LED 1, 2 (L5, L6) may also be turned on.

The lighting state of the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is maintained until a command (here, a RAM clear command) is transmitted from the game control device 100. In the game control device 100, an activation wait time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal activation of programs of other control devices after the power is turned on (steps S7 to S12). For this reason, the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 is transmitted after passing through this activation wait time, so at least over this activation wait time Special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and Special figure 2 fourth symbol LED ( The lighting state of L2) is maintained, and the time necessary for confirming the operation status is ensured.

Then, when the activation wait time elapses, the game control device 100 performs a process of clearing the RAM, and transmits a RAM clear command to the effect control device 300 (t22). After that, the game can be started by performing necessary processing. In the production control device 300, by receiving the RAM clear command, the process of outputting the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) is turned off (step C122 in FIG. 45) Then, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) and the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2) are turned off. In the power-on scenario data setting process (step C125), in order to notify that the RAM has been cleared, the decoration LED is blinked for a RAM clear notification period (for example, 30 seconds), or if the RAM clear has not been completed. Performs processing such as outputting a sound indicating what has been done.

A game can be executed during this RAM clearing notification period, and here, a starting prize is generated during the RAM clearing notification period and a first start memory or a second start memory is generated (t23). Along with this, a special figure variation display game is started in the game control device 100, but in the effect control device 300, the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) or the special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be executed Flashing variable display is performed on the four pattern LEDs (L2), and the notification of RAM clearing by flashing of decoration LEDs and output of sound indicating RAM clearing is continued. Then, when the RAM clear notification period ends (t24), the blinking of the decoration LED and the output of the sound indicating RAM clearing are finished, and the decoration LED and the like also perform the decoration operation according to the game being executed.

By doing so, the special figure variation display game started in the RAM clearing notification period is displayed by the special figure 1 fourth symbol LED (L1) or the special figure 2 fourth symbol LED (L2). Since the execution of the game can be confirmed and the notification of RAM clearing is performed over the scheduled time, the notification can be reliably performed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. It is possible to apply the configuration of the screen shot function and the notification during the small hit described above to the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 73, the game machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 74) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls dispensed when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by operating the production button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 74), the performance etc. that intervenes the player's operation are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.). Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating. This board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

In addition, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 . The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 84).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first starting winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 84). In addition, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second starting winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 84).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, there is a first special game ball that can be converted into a state that does not accept game balls and a state that it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker type open/close door 38c which can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how the upper grand prize opening is closed (closed state disadvantageous to the player), it is converted to an open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the first special variable prize winning device 38 includes an upper big winning prize opening that is opened and closed by an open/close door 38c driven by an upper big winning prize opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 84) as a driving device, for example. During the special game state based on , the state of the upper prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper prize winning port, and giving the player a predetermined game value (prize ball ) is given.

Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), an upper special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 84) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening. there is In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two upper special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the upper special winning opening is detected by one of the upper special winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the upper special winning opening switches 38a in this manner, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the upper special winning opening.

Directly below the first starting prize winning port 36, a second special variable prize winning device (lower large prize winning port) 39 is arranged which can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls according to the result of the special figure variable display game. It is The second special variable winning device 39 is provided with an opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls down to the front side and can be converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow in.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker type open/close door 39c which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) of the lower grand prize opening is changed to the open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 has a lower big winning prize opening opened and closed by an open/close door 39c driven by a lower big winning prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 84) as a driving device, for example, to During the special game state based on , the state of the lower prize winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the lower prize winning port, giving the player a predetermined game value (prize ball ) is given.

A lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 84) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided inside the lower special winning opening (winning area). . In addition, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win, such as a winning port.

The arrangement of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 74, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacently above or below the first special variable winning device 38 . In this case, they may be completely overlapped in the vertical direction, or they may be shifted to the left and right so that only a part of them overlaps in the vertical direction. In addition, the opening/closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and there are other types such as a slide type that can open the large prize winning opening by sliding a plate-like member that can close the large winning opening. may be of the form

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. ing. Then, the player can shoot the game ball to the left side game area by adjusting the shooting force (so-called left hitting), thereby aiming to win the first start prize opening 36, and shoot the game ball to the right side game area. By hitting (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim to win a prize to the second starting prize-winning port 37 or the first special variable prize-winning device 38 . It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed even if the game ball is shot to either the left or right game area.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and discharges to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the channel formed by the channel forming member 42 . At least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. .

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the collective display of various information A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 75, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) for a special figure 1 variation display game composed of a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) etc. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 (D2) for special figure 2 variation display game, and special figure 1 variation display game configured with LED lamp Notification of starting memory number and a storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14) for.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 60 (D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed), left-handed ( The first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) that informs the player of the advantageous hitting method (playing method corresponding to the game state) between the normal hitting) and the right hitting, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game (high A probability display section 78 (D15 to D18) is provided to notify the probability state or low probability state). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Furthermore, a normal figure fluctuation display game is executed like a conventional gaming machine, and a second start winning opening that allows a game ball to win a prize based on the fact that the normal figure fluctuation display game has a specific result. When equipped with a variable winning device, a normal figure display unit that displays a normal figure variation display game, a memory display unit for notifying the start memory number of the normal figure variation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs A time saving state notification unit or the like for notifying may be provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, as shown in FIG. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is fluctuating, and it is configured to be able to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The memory display unit 54 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the first start winning port 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51, as shown in Fig. 75 (c ) by turning off and lighting (blinking) a plurality of LEDs. The round display section 60 is composed of LED lamps, etc. As shown in FIG. 75(d), all the LEDs are turned off when the special game state is not in progress, and selected according to the special result during the special game state. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. It should be noted that the round display section may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 75(e), the first game state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), all the LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 75(e), the probability display unit 78 turns off all LEDs when the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), and changes the probability state of a big hit to a high probability state (probability variable state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 76 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 indicator 51. FIG. During the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, the center segment and the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments are blinked at a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result upon completion of the variable time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of the lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like.

FIG. 77 and FIG. 78 show display modes in the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. During the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game, the central segment blinks at a cycle of 100 msec. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a manner corresponding to the result upon completion of the variable time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, one of the lighting modes is selected by a random number or the like. A plurality of patterns of lighting modes are set for each of the big hits and small wins, which will be described later. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally trying to acquire a game ball at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52.

FIG. 79 shows the probability of a big win and a small win, the distribution probability of a big win type when winning a big win, and the distribution probability of a small win type when winning a small win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the 1 special variable winning device 38 or the 2nd special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a big hit (first special result), is common to special figures 1 and 2, and the probability in the normal game state which is a low probability state and the specific game state which is a high probability state is shown in the figure. The probability is as shown in 79(a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit ends, the state becomes a high probability state, and when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times), the state becomes a low probability state. is configured to be In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 79(b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate. Therefore, in the high-probability state, it will always be elected to either the big hit or the small hit for the special figure 2. It should be noted that there may be cases where the result is a deviation.

In addition, FIG. 79(c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in special figures 1 and 2, and the special variable winning device and distribution probability that are opened in each jackpot type, and FIG. 79(d) shows special Fig. 1 and special figure 2 show selectable types of small hits, special variable winning devices opened for each type of small hits, opening time, number of times of opening and allocation probability. It should be noted that the 2R probability variation D1 of the special figure 2 can hardly be expected to be put out, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 times again. In the special game state based on this 2R variable probability D1, an effect is performed in which the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added.

80 and 81 show the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 80(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a failure in a low-probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first start winning port 36 by hitting to the left, and to aim to win a prize to the second starting winning port 37 by hitting to the right. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is mainly executed according to the intention of the player. In addition, depending on the game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

In the low probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for the special figure 2, even if any variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal game state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variation display game. The execution of the FIG. 2 variation display game is made to be inefficient in terms of time, and in a low-probability state, the player is allowed to proceed with the special figure 1 variation display game mainly.

FIG. 80(b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a failure in a high-probability state. In the high probability state, the variation pattern is not set because there is no case where the result of the lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game is lost. In addition, only one variation pattern is selected for the special figure 1 variation display game. In this high-probability state, contrary to the above-described low-probability state, the special figure 2 variation display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variation display game is designed to be irregular variation.

Here, the fluctuation time in the case of deviation in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation in the high probability state is the deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation in the low probability state. is set shorter than the fluctuation time of (see FIG. 80(a)). As will be described later, a short time is set as the variation time when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit or a small hit in a high probability state, and in a high probability state, a lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game This is because there is no case where the result of

In other words, in a high-probability state where the special figure 2 variation display game has a short variation time and can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variation display game, which has a losing result as a result of the lottery, is clearly disadvantageous. , the player can progress the game mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game without setting a very long variable time. Therefore, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, it is not necessary to set a longer fluctuation time than necessary, but when it is executed at the same time as the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is mainly In order to progress the game, the variation time is set to be sufficiently long with respect to the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the game is forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variation display game.

FIG. 81(a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big win in a low-probability state. For special figure 2, it is possible to select only the variation pattern that does not generate a reach state. In the low probability state, the variation time when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit may be set to a variation time longer than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a big win. FIG. 81(b) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big win in a high probability state. Variation patterns with very short variation times, none of which cause a reach condition, are selected.

In particular, for the special figure 1 variation display game, when comparing including the variation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 variation display game results in a big hit or a small hit, the second shortest variation time is selected. ing. As a result, even in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game, which is an irregular variation, is likely to stop earlier than the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit. is less likely to be changed to a forced out-of-order result. It should be noted that although the distribution of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed according to the above-described jackpot type, it may be determined by random numbers or the like.

FIG. 81(c) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small win in a low probability state. For special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 81(d) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. Variation patterns with very short variation times, none of which cause a reach condition, are selected. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the same time as the case of loss in the high probability state, but this is also forced to stop due to the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as in the case of loss. It is enough time to be Regarding the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 variable display game loses or becomes a small hit in a high probability state, it should be enough time to be forced to stop by the special figure 2 variable display game big hit or small hit. can be shorter than the times given here.

82 and 83 show a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 82 shows the opening and closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the big hit type and the small winning type selectable in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. The opening and closing pattern of the special variable winning device in the winning type is shown.

For example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable A1 jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the special figure 1 top big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1. . In the special figure 1 upper big prize opening opening and closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000ms, the opening period of 29000ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, rounds in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated until 16 rounds are performed, and the special game state ends after an ending period of 11000 ms.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening/closing pattern shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 is the sum of the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which the first half 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time, and the latter half 600 ms is the interval time. In addition, the ending period in the special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which the first half 1400 ms is the remaining ball processing time, and the latter half 9600 ms is the ending time.

Other opening and closing patterns are fanfare period, open period, interval period (including remaining ball processing time) and ending period (including remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. In addition, the special figure 2 upper big winning opening opening/closing pattern 5 in FIG. 83 is configured by repeating the opening period of 200 ms and closing of 1500 ms 11 times in the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R, and then opening for 25000 ms. Also, in any open/close pattern, when a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point.

In addition, for example, if the opening and closing patterns are the same from the start of the special game state to the middle, such as special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening and closing patterns 1 to 3 and special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing patterns 2 and 3, the display The performance in the device 41 may be the same, and it may be made difficult to distinguish between the types of big wins and the kinds of small wins. Furthermore, it is also possible to suggest or notify information that enables determination of the kind of big win or the kind of small win during the special game state.

In addition, when a big hit is executed by either of the special figure 2 top big winning opening opening and closing patterns 4 and 5, the effect of whether the long opening round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether to continue) is performed. You can do it. In this case, for example, if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 4, short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit ends, and if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 5, 5R In the special figure 2 above, a short opening that is almost the same as the opening and closing pattern 4 from 5R to 16R is performed, and then a long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and after that, the same long opening as up to 4R is resumed. . Therefore, using the time between 5R and 15R if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 4, and the short opening of 5R if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 5 Continuous production is performed, and if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 4, the result that the long opening does not resume (the jackpot game does not continue) is notified, and if the special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 5 By informing the result that the long opening is restarted (the big win game is continued), the expectation of the player may be aroused.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (jackpot) that can generate the first special game state, and the second special game with a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. A second special result (minor win) that can generate a state is included.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and enters the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening. 36, win the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and be discharged from the game area 32 be done. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port The corresponding number of prize balls is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 84).

The winning ball to the first starting winning hole 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting hole 1 switch 36a provided inside, and is used as the first starting memory. number) is stored. In a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the number of first start memories is 0, when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole 36, the first start memory is generated along with the start right. is stored, and the first start memory number is added by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is started immediately based on the first start memory, and the first start memory number is subtracted by 1 at this time. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variation display game has not ended, or when it is in a special game state. When a game ball wins the first start winning port 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, 1 is added to the first start memory number and one first start memory is stored. . Then, in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more, when the special figure 1 variation display game can be started (end of the previous special figure 1 variation display game or end of the special game state), the first The starting memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning hole 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting hole 2 switch 37a provided inside. When there is a winning to the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variation display game has not ended, or when it is in a special game state Secondly, even if the game ball wins the second start winning port 37, the second start memory is not generated. In addition, when there is a prize to the second start winning port 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is generated once for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be consumed immediately, the second starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not occur.

In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, and the extracted random number values are stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 84). To the special figure storage area (part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 4 times for the first start memory). And the number of memories of this special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 reservation display device) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and also in the display device 41 of the center case 40 It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the first start memory, and the second start A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on a special figure 2 display device 52 (second variation display device) based on the winning to the winning opening 37 . The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time. When it becomes, the one special figure fluctuation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (loss result).

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display in the display mode as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 .

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device (image display device) 41 displays various types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.). A decoration special figure variation display game is executed. In the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, there are a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and these are separate is displayed in the display area. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the case of the normal game state which is a low probability state, the variation time is the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁In addition, the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Then, when a big win occurs and a special game state is entered, the player can aim at the first special variable winning device 38 by hitting to the right. In addition, when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in a special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to aim for right-handed or left-handed. After the end of the special game state based on the big hit, it becomes a specific game state which is a high probability state. In this specific game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is short, so it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variation display game by hitting to the right and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. becomes. In the specific game state, the opening of the special variable winning device based on the small win and the opening of the special variable winning device based on the big win occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize winning port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start prize winning port 37. A switch 37a, a winning opening switch 35a, a plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper large winning opening switches 38a disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, and a second special variable winning device 39 An interface chip (which is connected to the lower prize-winning port switch 39a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V). A proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the upper major winning port switch 38a and the lower major winning port switch 39a are sent to the second input port 123. is input to Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, by the game machine controlling the game. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the opening/closing data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and the opening/closing data for the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning device 39 are provided. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the . The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50; 4 drivers 138d are provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper big winning port switch 38a and the lower prize-winning slot switch 39a are equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 .
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the performance, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In these control circuits, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, a random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. Then, the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for judging the big hit in the first start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit/loss and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning opening 37, the random number for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is extracted and stored in the RAM 111C. Memorize the starting memory. The random value for judging the big hit in the second start storage is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit/loss and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. In addition, the second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variation display game can be started, and temporarily stores the information necessary to start the special figure 2 variation display game. , It does not suspend the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, processing for displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning areas (the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37). make a means

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, and also displays the special result mode. Execute the process that generates the state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, causes the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b to open the open/close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, thereby allowing game balls to flow into the upper special winning opening. to control. Alternatively, the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is opened by the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the lower special winning opening.

Then, the game balls of a predetermined number (for example, 9) enter the big winning opening or until a predetermined opening time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. The opening is regarded as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 90 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (eg 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 86, first, the processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the top 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the standby time starts, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. detectable. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. I have to keep doing it. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step X9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (Step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (Step X9). Also, if the power failure monitor signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0. is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15), read first However, it is judged from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step X19). match the checksum (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 87, and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Also, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 87 to perform initialization. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. form.

At step X21 in FIG. 87, the initial value at the time of power failure restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22), step Proceed to X28. In the case of this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, etc. are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing to be described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed. Send the command for the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, and X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of this embodiment, in step X27, the model designation command, special figure 1 pending number command, probability information command, RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen, light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command for notifying RAM initialization). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted.

At step X28, a process of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step X28, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (Big win symbol random number, small win symbol random number)) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (step X30), and then interrupt is permitted (step X31). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, and the small hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number and small hit pattern random number are processed by the program as a timer interrupt process. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) with the same period. In addition, in the big hit pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number and the small hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step X33), and power failure is performed. It is determined whether or not the monitor signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number update process (step X32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step X32 may be performed in the main process as well as in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. In addition, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and it is only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the ON state of the power failure monitor signal has not continued for the number of checks (Step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitor signal is ON (Step X34). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily inhibiting interruption (step X36) is performed. A process (step X37) of outputting OFF data to the output port is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the operation of the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 88 shows the checksum calculation processing (steps X19 and X40) in the main processing described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of the RAM being used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and the checksum is completed (step X57). If the calculation has not ended (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 to repeat the above process. If the calculation is finished (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is finished.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 89 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big win design initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small win design initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is finished. Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 90 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to transfer the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step X104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (upper special winning opening solenoid 38b, lower special winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X105), random number update processing 1 (step X106), and random number update processing 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, it monitors whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the upper special winning port switch 38a, and the lower special winning port switch 39a, and monitors errors. Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing (step X108) is performed (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.).

Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) for performing processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step X112), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X113) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, the external information editing process (step X115) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process ends.
Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input processing (step X103) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
After preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch read processing (step X128) is performed.

After that, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
After preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing ends.

In this embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but it is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.
Information prepared for each input port is used as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch read processing (steps X128 and X133) in the above input processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X142), and after inverting the bits that need to be inverted (step X143), the port input status 1 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step X144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second read (step X145).

After the delay time (0.1 ms) has passed, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), and after inverting the bit that needs to be inverted (step X148), the port input status 2 of the target switch control area is obtained. (step X149). After that, in the first and second readings, a definite bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 1 and bits with different states are set to 0 (step X150). It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which bits with the same state are set to 0 and bits with different states are set to 1 in the first and second readings (step X152). The product is taken and used as the previously held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like is removed. Then, the current defined bit and the previously held bit are synthesized and saved as the current defined state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken, and the result is saved as a rising edge (step X155). End switch read processing.

If the cycle of the timer interrupt is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method for judging whether or not it has been done, but if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct judgment cannot be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above problem.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (step X104) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 84) for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b are synthesized and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit lines of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X163). X164), and synthesizes the acquired information and external information data (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is used for external information output. Output to port 137 (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step X174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) to terminate the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (scheduled number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). , and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated with a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not If there is no count (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether or not the count numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. (step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

Also, in step X181, when it is determined that there is a count (step X181; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter The number of payouts corresponding to the area is obtained (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new remaining number of prize balls (step X186), and the result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step X187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fractional number that is less than the predetermined number that is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10, which is a predetermined number that serves as a reference for outputting the main prize ball signal, is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the remaining number of prize balls area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the remaining number of prize balls area. If the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191). , return to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls concentrates during a big win, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.

At step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X192), and it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start the payout control immediately. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

The undefined state is set by, for example, clearing the busy signal flag area during power-on processing. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the status of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period in a state indicating that the payout control can or cannot be started immediately. to resolve. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. Instead, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 continuously outputting over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. It should be noted that here, even when the state is indefinite, it is determined to be busy. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, thereby avoiding unnecessary processing. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the win number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not

Then, if there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether or not the check of the count number is finished (step X197). When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

Also, in step X195, if it is determined that there is a count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), and acquires a payout command corresponding to the address of target winning number counter area 1 (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 ms as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it is.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs the control of transmitting the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. data to maintain the payout control state. However, the conventional game machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the payout of prize balls can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer. It will be possible to accurately grasp the timing, for example, to accurately grasp the base value. In addition, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball have different transmission timings. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be reliably managed.

From the above, as well as performing overall game control, the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning opening 38 , a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, the game a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing ball payout control, and the game control means outputs a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means; (busy signal), a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure. is output, the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period without immediately transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. In response to this, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Also, in the game area 32, a winning area with a different number of winning balls (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) is provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. and when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200) The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control prior to specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command that has not been transmitted to each prize ball command counter. It means that we are trying to do it.

In addition, while performing overall game control, predetermined winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39 ), a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to ), and a payout control for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start payout control according to a state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. Prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when indicating that, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of game balls in a predetermined prize winning area. external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) containing information about The signal is such that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start payout control.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100), when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command transmission means immediately is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball signals (main prize ball signals). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning region (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35 , 1st special variable winning device 38, 2nd special variable winning device 39) generates a prize ball command in units of one winning, and when the state signal indicates that payout control can be started, one to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) receives the winning information in units of one winning to a predetermined winning area can be stored, and updating is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning area, and updating is performed in correspondence with transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means, so that a prize ball command that has not been transmitted The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be put out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize winning area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and the winning ball signal counter can store information on the winning in units of one winning to a predetermined winning area, and the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area is possible. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated by updating the number of prize balls in accordance with the accumulation processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random Number Update Processing 1]
FIG. 95 shows random number update processing 1 (step X106) in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 90). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit design random number and the small hit design random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for setting of the next initial value (start value) (step X221).

If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). In addition, when the jackpot pattern random number is waiting for initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot pattern initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot pattern random number corresponds. A register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set (step X223). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. In addition, when the small-hit design random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small-hit design initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial of the loaded small-hit design random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random Number Update Processing 2]
FIG. 96 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 90). The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and random number update processing 2 updates both. , and the update target is switched each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, update processing is performed at different interrupt times for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach fluctuation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. is configured as follows.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit judgment value for each type of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the game microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be imparted to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired to mask the value of the M1 counter (step X235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, is set in the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower order of the M1 counter Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining after masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as a masked value) is added with "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X236; N). X238), and proceed to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid the fact that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added afterward, the value before addition will not change. be.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). , go to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), the upper 1 byte of the random number is set to "0", and the lower 1 byte of the random number is the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte ) is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number is used as a new random number, and it is determined whether or not this new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is used again as a new random number (step X244). Byte random numbers or 2-byte random numbers are saved in the lower random number area (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247 ), and the random number update process 2 ends.

Thus, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Therefore, the CPU 111A selects the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining

[Winning gate switch/status monitoring process]
FIG. 97 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 90). In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning hole monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper big winning hole switch 38a in the upper big winning hole (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). , a fraud & winning monitoring process (step X302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning.

The winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) contains the monitoring switch bit that indicates the position of the data that determines whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, and the fraudulent winning error. A notification command, an upper limit value for the number of fraudulent winnings (the number of determined fraudulent occurrences), an address of a winning opening switch table, and information on notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1, and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening switch table. The fraud monitoring table and winning table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X303) to monitor whether there is an illegal winning. A fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (step X305). Winning number counter update process (step X306) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is scheduled to be executed as a subject is performed (step X307).

Next, update a state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (step X308). This state scan counter is updated with a range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector. When it is set and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the abnormal payout status signal is set.

Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, state monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and the state scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the gaming machine status is checked to determine whether an error has occurred. Processing (step X315) is performed.

By referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, the state can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector. set. Incidentally, in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter is 1 to 3, it is not defined.

After that, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is completed. do. Note that the processing from steps X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from steps X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Fraud & Winning Monitoring Process]
FIG. 98 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed for each of the two upper big winning opening switches 38 a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower big winning opening switch 39 a of the second special variable winning device 39 . As for the big prize openings (special variable prize winning devices 38, 39), fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the opening/closing door, inserting game balls, and paying out prize balls are likely to occur, so fraud is monitored in addition to detection of prize winning. .

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and is the winning opening to be monitored for errors. When the switch is the lower big winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the fraudulent winning number after addition is the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) is exceeded (step X325).

The reason why the determination number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is caught in the valid period of the big winning opening switch. This is to avoid judging it as fraud when a prize is won past the time limit or when noise is superimposed on the signal, and to avoid simply judging an error even though it is not fraudulent.

If the determination number is not exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). In addition, if the determination number is exceeded (step X325; Y), the fraudulent prize winning number is kept at the fraud occurrence determination number (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent prize winning notification timer area (step X327). Next, a target fraudulent occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (step X330), and execute winning number counter update processing (step X331) for setting prize balls. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). Then, if the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the error-monitoring target winning prize opening switch is the upper large winning prize opening switch 38a, and permitted when the error monitoring target winning prize opening switch is the other upper large winning prize opening switch 38a. not. As a result, the update of the notification timer is performed twice as frequently as to the fraudulent notification of the first special variable prize winning device 38, preventing time-up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . In addition, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the lower special winning opening switch 39a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step X336), and the illegal winning cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraudulent & winning monitoring process this time, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared ( Step X339), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. It is compared with the value of the illegality flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step X342), the cheating & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an illegal winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the cancellation of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Processing for updating winning number counter]
FIG. 99 shows winning number counter update processing (steps X306, X331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning opening switch (more precisely, input change ) (step X352).

If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether or not all switches have been monitored (step X362). Also, if there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether there is an overflow (step X354). step X355). Then, if no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). Also, if an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target win number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After loading the target winning number counter area 2 value (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not there is an overflow (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361 ), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether or not all switches have been monitored (step X362).

If monitoring of all switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). Also, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step X362; Y), the win number counter update process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning to the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 100 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), return to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). , determines whether the transmit buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), return to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

In this way, by transmitting commands to the effect control device 300 through serial communication, the load on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and command analysis can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is no longer necessary to take in commands within the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Fluctuation Monitoring Process]
FIG. 101 shows the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal game state which is the low probability state, but the player who does not know this Alternatively, a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game may hit right. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for performing notification to prompt such a player to hit left is performed.

In this special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 variation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 variation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 variation check flag (step X387). Also, if there is a special figure 1 variation check flag (step X381; Y), clear the special figure 1 variation check flag (step X382) and update the special figure 1 variation number by +1 (step X383).

Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is determined whether it is smaller than the specified value (for example 18) (step X384), and if it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), check whether there is a special figure 2 variation check flag Determine (step X387). Also, if it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number added by executing the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state (low probability state) must be 0. If -1 update (step X385), to clear the number of special figure 1 variation to 0 (step X386), determine whether there is a special figure 2 variation check flag (step X387). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a low probability state. In the determination of whether there is a special figure 2 variation check flag (step X387), there is no special figure 2 variation check flag (step X387; N) moves to step X390. Also, if there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), clear the special figure 2 variation check flag (step X388), update the special figure 2 abnormal variation number by +1 (step X389), special figure 2 It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (eg, 5) (step X390).

If the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is kept at the specified value (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer is set to the initial value (for example 60000ms) is set (step X392). Next, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and it moves to step X399. In this case, although it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to play the game mainly with the special figure 1 fluctuation display game by hitting left, the player hits right and special. FIG. 2 is a case where the variable display game is being executed, and processing is performed to notify the player to hit left.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396 ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the time is up (step X396; Y), prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X397) and prepare a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step X398).

After that, the prepared flag determines whether it is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step X399). And if the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area are the same (step X399; Y), that is, if there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X400).

If the prepared flag is not a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, save the prepared flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X402), effect command setting processing is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X400; Y), after clearing the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations to 0 (step X401), perform the processing of steps X402 and X403 (Step X403), end the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal variation, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is produced with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal variation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification will be set.

FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 show an example of processing by the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 102, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3, and the special figure 1 variation number is 15. When the next special figure 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 variation number changes from 15 to 16. Also, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value of 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by -1 and changes from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 variation number is cleared to 0 be. Thereafter, similarly, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 each time the special figure 1 variation display game is started (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value 18 (t17), Special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and special figure 1 variation number is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted every time the special figure 1 variation display game of the specified number (here, 18 times) is executed.

FIG. 103 shows the case where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal game state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated from 3 to 4. Furthermore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches 5 which is the specified value.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the game machine error state signal output to the device outside the game machine is started, It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with the management device of the game parlor or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of this command, it is notified that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, sound, or the like.

Also, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value of 5, the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer starts timing (t22), and after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has passed ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the game machine error state signal is stopped. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 terminates the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is newly started before the predetermined time elapses, the timing of the predetermined time is newly started from that point.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally It is possible to prevent that it is immediately determined to be special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation when winning the second start winning opening 37. Furthermore, by performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times, the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is subtracted, so that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation that occurred regarding the winning of the unintended second start winning opening 37 If the number is played after that, it will be eliminated, and it is possible to prevent mere mistakes and other players' game results from accumulating and being determined to be special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations.

In addition, the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number that will be notified of the special figure 2 abnormal variation and the specified value of the special figure 1 variation number that will be processed to subtract the special figure 2 abnormal variation number are arbitrarily Configurable. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it is a value that allows the player not to aim at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Also, even when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed, the payout of prize balls for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 104 shows gaming machine state check processing (steps X310, X312, and X315) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring processing. In this gaming machine state check process, first, the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the top address of the state monitoring area, the lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, the mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, the signal ON judgment data, status OFF command (error notification end command for error system), status ON command (error notification start command for error system), status OFF monitoring timer comparison value, status ON monitoring timer Contains a comparison value.

If the target signal is not ON (step X452: N), a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and the target state OFF command is obtained and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (step X455), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step X459). When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the error-related signal indicates that there is no error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch switch has not been touched. be.

On the other hand, if the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and the target state ON command is obtained and prepared (step X457). After that, the target state-on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state are compared (step X459). When the target signal is ON (step X452: Y), it means that the signal of the error system indicates an error (abnormality or illegality), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the touch switch is touched. It is a state indicating

If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). , determines whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control region and the current signal state do not match (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control region ( step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

If the target state monitoring timer value is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 to remain at the comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the subject status flag field (step X465).

Then, when the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine status check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and effect command setting processing is executed. Go (step X467) to end the gaming machine state check process. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payment busy signal check processing]
FIG. 105 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process described above. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is ON (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is not ON (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). Also, if the payout busy signal is ON (step X471; Y), prepare a busy state flag as a state flag (step X474), and set the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step X475) .

After that, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the current signal state, that is, whether there is a change between ON and OFF (step X476), and if the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is turned off. +1 update (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. In addition, when the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is decremented by -1. (Step X481), the prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process ends.

By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time. etc.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and remains in an indefinite state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. , and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately grasps that the payout process can be performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being broken.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493).

Based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, if the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the probability is low (step X494). And when it is in the low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). After that, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (step X497), and perform the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step X498).

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. In the high probability state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player, and when winning is detected in the high-probability state in the first start prize-winning port 36 which is designed not to win unless left-handed hitting is in progress. Right hitting instruction information is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) is prepared (step X499), hardware random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and a jackpot random number is determined based on the winning to the second starting winning port 37. It is determined whether or not there is starting entrance winning information that is set when acquired (step X501).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the second starting opening winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set. On the other hand, when the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. Also, if it is not in the high probability (step X502; N), it is determined whether it is in the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the big hit, that is, in the big hit (step X503).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. Also, if it is not during the big hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether it is during the high-probability final variation (step X504). The high probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for the predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high probability state is running the last special figure fluctuation display game that was played.

If it is during this high-probability final fluctuation (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the high-probability final variation is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). Thereafter, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 (step X507), perform the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step X508), and end the starting port switch monitoring processing.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification is performed to instruct the player to hit left by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in a low probability state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left-handed. He is trying to perform left-handed instruction|indication alerting|reporting.

In the first special game state, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened except for some jackpot types, so even in a low probability state, left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Also, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed last in a high probability state, it is changed to a low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so it is in a low probability state during the game, but the game is high. Since the determination is made in the probability state, there is a high possibility that the special game state will occur, and since the specific game state is produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 107 shows the hardware random number acquisition process (steps X492, X500) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process. In this hardware random number acquisition process, first, no start winning prize information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. Also, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted into the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start winning prize information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
FIG. 108 shows the special figure starting opening 1 switch process (step X498) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the number of times of outputting the starting port signal 1, which is the number of times information regarding the number of times of winning to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the game machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (Step X523). Then, if the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the value after updating is saved in the starting port signal 1 output count area of RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is less than the upper limit (step X525). On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but when the upper limit is stored, the value after updating is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

If the special figure 1 pending number is less than the upper limit (here 4) (step X525; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the variation pattern in the special figure pending information determination process described later ( Step X526), update +1 the number of Toku-zu 1 pending (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is RWM's jackpot random number Save in the storage area (step X529).

Thereafter, a jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, a small winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in a small winning symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X532). Subsequently, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, perform special figure reservation information determination processing (step X534), which is a look-ahead process, prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step X535), perform production command setting processing ( Step X536), end the special figure starting port 1 switch processing. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36, and can store the predetermined random number as the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It constitutes a first start memory means.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 109 shows the special figure reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step X541), and if it is in a high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. . Also, if it is not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether it is in the first special game state, which is the special game state based on the big hit, ie, the big hit (step X542).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. Also, if the big hit is not in progress (step X542; N), a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table is set (step X545), stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared big hit pattern random number is acquired (step X546), A prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop design information for the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop design command corresponding to the stop design information is prepared (step X551). Also, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step X548; N), set stop design information for losing (step X550), and prepare a look-ahead stop design command corresponding to the stop design information (step X551).

After preparing a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), effect command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, a special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a special figure 1 variation pattern setting for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing is performed (step X554).

Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game (step X555), and perform the effect command setting process. Do (step X556) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in step X554 are the special figure 1 variation start processing of the special figure 1 normal processing, which is executed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game is similar to

By the above processing, including the look-ahead stop pattern command including the result of the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory, and the information of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁As a result, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory, the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory It is possible to inform the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., and the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 can determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before starting the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means. Form a possible first determination means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). determination of whether or not) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

In addition, this special figure reservation information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variation display game, and for the special figure 2 variation display game that does not generate the start memory for suspending the start of the special figure variation display game Not done. Further, when the probability is high, the prefetching process is not performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly lost by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variation display game. This is because it is almost always stopped at In other words, most of the results are lost, so there is not much meaning in announcing the look-ahead result, and after announcing the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to a lost result. This is because there may be a contradiction between

However, for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, no starting memory is generated to suspend the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so during the first period of the specific game state There is a special figure 1 fluctuation while there is the first starting memory There is a high possibility that only the display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first starting memory that performs such a look-ahead effect, since the look-ahead processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the specific game state, those that occurred after the start of the specific game state are used. , the look-ahead processing is performed for the target of such a look-ahead effect. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined in another process whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
FIG. 110 shows the special figure starting opening 2 switch process (step X508) in the starting opening switch monitoring process described above. In this special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the number of times of outputting the starting port signal 2, which is the number of times the information about the number of times of winning to the second starting winning port 37 is output to the management device outside the game machine 10, is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (Step X563). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal 2 output frequency region (step X564), and the starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The starting gate 2 prize winning is invalid, while the special figure 1 variable display game that resulted in a special result (big win or small win) is stopped (during the special figure display process described later), during the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. If this starting opening 2 winning prize is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure starting opening 2 switch processing is terminated. Also, if the starting gate 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), set the special figure 2 reservation number to 1 (step X566), calculate the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (step X567 ), the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process described above are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot pattern random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, a small winning design random number is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 2 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a starting winning memory means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the second starting winning opening 37 . In addition, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 111 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. Toku-zu 1 To control the entire process related to the variable display game, to set the display of Toku-zu 1. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, whether the special figure 2 is a big hit/minor win, that is, a special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (step Y101).

If the special figure 2 big hit/small hit is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y103). ). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Take action to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a special winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state that is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processes are performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special To perform special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during FIG. 1 fluctuation. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Processing during special figure 1 display (step Y110) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 1 processing A big winning hole remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the big win end process is performed. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. In the small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the necessary information, etc., is performed. At step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y116) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or the small winning end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small winning end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y119), perform the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y120), special FIG. 1 ends the game processing. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
FIG. 112 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. This special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, whether the special figure 1 is a big hit/minor win, that is, a special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big win or a small win. (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 ( Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit/small hit of special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Take action to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game becoming a big win or a small win, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 and the subsequent processes are performed. Also, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 is determined (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (here, 60,000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), set the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number in the register (step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y138).

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", monitor the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the effect, Performs special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing FIG. 2 fluctuation processing. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Processing during special figure 2 display (step Y141) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big hit round is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 2 processing A large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. In the small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the necessary information, etc., is performed. At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. conduct.

At step Y138, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or the small winning end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y152), perform the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y153), special FIG. 2 ends the game processing. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 113 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). Then, when the upper special prize opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper special winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining balls in the upper special winning opening are being processed (step Y162). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning opening remaining ball processing based on the big win and the small winning remaining ball processing based on the small win.

When the process of remaining balls in the upper big winning hole is being processed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Also, if the remaining balls in the upper big winning opening are not being processed (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). Then, if the lower special winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the lower special winning opening is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164).

It should be noted that the opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means opening in the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the first special result (big hit), and special game state based on the second special result (small hit). Includes both open in the second special game state. Also, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, it may be determined by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, and by setting a flag indicating whether it is in each state, The determination may be made based on this flag.

If there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if there is an input to the lower big winning slot switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the big winning slot added in this big winning slot switch monitoring process. (step Y165), and proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in step Y166, when the upper special winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining balls in the upper special winning opening are being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0. set (step Y166). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (one upper special winning opening switch 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

Also, when there is an input to the upper big winning hole switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a big winning hole count command is prepared (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable prize winning device 38, a large prize winning opening count command is transmitted in order to perform a winning effect. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the other upper special winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

Then, when there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. Also, when there is an input to the upper big winning hole switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a big winning hole count command is prepared (step Y172), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), if the large winning opening remaining balls are being processed (step Y176; Y), or if the minor winning remaining balls are being processed (step Y177; Y) If it is either, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the processing for remaining small winning balls is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is determined. The value of the counter is added to the big winning hole count number (step Y178), and it is determined whether or not the big winning hole count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can win in one round) (step Y179).

If the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the large winning opening count exceeds the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the large winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the game is being opened in a big hit, that is, in a first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big win (step Y182).

If it is not open for a big win (step Y182; N), that is, if it is open for a small win, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value for ending the jackpot opening operation is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning opening is closed and one round ends.

It should be noted that the large winning opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 also when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step Y164; Y). In addition, when there is remaining ball processing for the lower large winning opening, the large winning opening count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch during the remaining ball processing. You can do it.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 114 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

When the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing ends. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. Also, if left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the special figure variation display game last performed in the specific game state, which is a high probability state, is completed, thereby resulting in a normal game state, which is a low probability state. When shifting to , the left-handed instruction notification will be performed.

And, if the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information about special figure 1 variation display game is performed (step Y210), and decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211) , effect command setting processing is performed (step Y212). In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither special figure 1 variation display game nor special figure 2 variation display game is executed, special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (step Y213). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if it is not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y214). The high probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for the predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high probability state is running the last special figure fluctuation display game that was played.

If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if it is not during the high probability final fluctuation (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating processing transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 115 shows the special figure 2 usual process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed and the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in a state where fluctuation cannot be started, in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends. Also, if the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as described above, the special figure 2 suspension (second start memory) is based on the winning when there is a prize to the second start winning port 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started It is generated temporarily in order to perform the start processing of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure fluctuation display game like the first start memory.

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y227). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If it is not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y228). The high probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for the predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high probability state is running the last special figure fluctuation display game that was played.

If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. Also, if it is not during the high probability final fluctuation (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a low probability state. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y231). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232). Then, if the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y233), and if it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state Perform settings related processing. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y231; N), if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y232; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y233; Y) , the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect in accordance with the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the performance corresponding to the game state when the performance control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 116 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y241), and the deviation information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game , Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step Y242) for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting processing (step Y244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. (Step Y245).

After that, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. After that, a process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but when the special result (big hit or small hit) is derived on the one hand, the other is forcibly lost regardless of the lottery result. It ends as a result. In particular, since the special figure 2 variation display game always results in a big hit or a small hit, when the special figure 2 variation display game stops first, such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, even though the highly expected performance is performed, the game is forcibly stopped as a result of a failure, and the player has a sense of distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variation display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now on, it is possible to take measures such as not to select a highly anticipated effect. I'm trying

For this reason, first, it is determined whether the state is in the high probability state (step Y248), and if the state is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. When it is in a high probability state, it is a state in which the game proceeds mainly with the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is short and it is executed at a high frequency, so it is known that the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped due to a loss is high. , In the special figure 1 variable display game, since it is set in advance so as not to select an effect with a high degree of expectation, no special processing is performed here.

If it is not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y249). The high probability final fluctuation is during the execution (including the stop time) of the special figure fluctuation display game for the predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) from the end of the first special game state, and the lottery in the high probability state is running the last special figure fluctuation display game that was played.

If it is during the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes the high probability final variation will be stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now will be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it will end before the start of the effect. not performed.

Also, if it is not during the high probability final fluctuation (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y250). When special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step Y250; N), it moves to step Y257. In this case, since the probability is low, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started from now on, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game will be a very long variation time. Therefore, since the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped is low, the processing for preventing the selection of highly anticipated effects is not performed here.

If the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variation display game ends earlier, so that the highly expected effect is not selected. No processing.

Also, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variation display to be executed from now on It is determined whether or not the variation time of the game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, the processing for preventing the selection of highly expected effects is not performed.

In addition, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y256). After that, the high probability fluctuation count update process for managing the period to be in the high probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended. In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, processing such as regulating the selection of the production with high expectation for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It is supposed to be done.

In addition, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information on the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern number, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 may change to a variation pattern that does not select the highly anticipated effect. In addition, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may be left unchanged or may be changed. In addition, the processing (step Y255) for preparing a command to notify that the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

That is, in the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100, when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, the second variation display game It constitutes first variation mode determination means capable of determining variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process of resetting the variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means. is being executed, by referring to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information on the variation pattern is obtained without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game. It constitutes a second variation mode determining means capable of re-determining.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You can do it.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game can be selected as a result, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not it is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game of FIG. 2 is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss, this process is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variation display game is not forcibly stopped due to the result of the loss.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 117 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) in the special figure 2 normal processing described above. This special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, the special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation pattern discrimination area (step Y261), and the deviation information as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game , Big hit flag 2 setting processing (step Y262) for setting big hit information or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game Processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. After that, perform high probability fluctuation frequency update processing for managing the period to be in a high probability state (step Y268), and end the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

In addition, in the special figure 2 variation start process, the process for adjusting so as not to cause inconvenience between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that can be executed at the same time is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game is low, so the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly ended with a losing result. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of highly expected effects may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 118 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y273), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y272 (step Y278 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. Then (step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 119 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1, which is the jackpot decision result of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. Also, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Then (step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 120 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276, Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is judged whether or not it is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, if the high probability state (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step Y314), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316 ). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step Y315), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316). .

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 121 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y326), and finish the small hit judgment process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the judgment is about the special figure 1 variation display game. (Step Y322).

And, when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), set the small hit upper limit judgment value for special figure 1 (step Y323), the value of the target jackpot random number is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, if the information setting of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y322; N), that is, if the determination is about the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y326), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step Y327), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 122 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (step Y337), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (step Y338). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit design A small winning design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step Y340). Next, a special figure 1 small winning design table is set (step Y341), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design saving area (step Y342). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design pattern area (step Y343), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y346).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern save area (step Y344), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 1 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and production command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 123 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (step Y368). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and if it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit design A small winning symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step Y371), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design saving area (step Y372). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y373), and the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step Y376).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern save area (step Y374), and the loss stop pattern pattern is special figure 2 stop. It is saved in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and production command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 124 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is in a high probability (step Y401). If it is not in high probability (step Y401; N), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y402), and acquire the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern (step Y403) , It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. Moreover, when it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern is a small hit stop pattern pattern (step Y405). And when it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, when it is a loss, the process proceeds to step Y407. Also, if it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; Y), the value is updated by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the second half offset data (step Y406), and the special figure 1 reservation number is added to the first half offset data The value is converted by addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y408). And if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 1 miss/small hit at high probability (step Y409), and set the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation Set (step Y411). If it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit at high probability is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. (Step Y411).

And, while saving the first half offset data set as above in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y412), saving the second half offset data in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y413), special figure 1 information End the setting process.

In other words, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal game state, in the case of a small hit, the variation pattern considering the number of special figure 1 reservations is determined for both the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern, and in the case of loss Only the first half variation pattern is determined considering the special figure 1 reservation number, and in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 reservation number. Also, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the specific game state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 1 reservations.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
FIG. 125 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is in the high probability (step Y421). If the probability is high (step Y421; Y), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y422), and acquire the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern (step Y423 ), the process proceeds to step Y428.

On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). And if it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (step Y425), and set the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation Set (step Y427). If it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y427).

And, while saving the first half offset data set as above in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y428), saving the second half offset data in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y429), special figure 2 information End the setting process.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 126 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452) , The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is lost (step Y454; Y), 2 bytes distribution processing is performed. (Step Y455), the process proceeds to step Y457. Moreover, when the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y454; N), the distribution process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is a loss, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 are prepared (step Y458). Then, the allocation process (step Y459) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 Prepare (step Y464).

After that, sorting processing (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of being sorted is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 127 shows the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the second half variation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the second half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y472) , The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y473).

Next, a sorting process is performed (step Y474), and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y475). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of special figure 2 (step Y479 ).

After that, sorting processing (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of being sorted is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set. In addition, since there are few types of second half fluctuations for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the second half fluctuation group is not selected by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 128 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step Y455) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process described above. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte allocation process, first, it is checked whether the first data in the prepared second half variation group table (selection table) is a code without allocation (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but the second half that defines only the second half fluctuation pattern group in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" In the variation group table, since there is no need for sorting, a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is specified at the head.

If the data at the top of the second half variation group table is a code without sorting (step Y502; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y507), and the 2-byte sorting process ends. do. On the other hand, if the leading data in the second half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), one sorting value first specified in the second half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (variation pattern random number 1 value) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next allocation value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct. That is, in step Y503, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table, in step Y505, the determined random value is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

The above process is performed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second half variation selection table defined in the second half variation group table. Then, when it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of allocation is updated (step Y507), and 2-byte allocation processing is performed. exit.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 129 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process described above. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, it is checked whether the data at the top of the prepared second half variation selection table (selection table) or first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code for no sorting (that is, "0"). (step Y511). Here, like the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern and first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of the selection table without the , the sorting value "0", that is, the code of no sorting is specified at the head.

If the data at the top of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step Y512; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and sorting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if the head data of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step Y512; N), one sorting value initially specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained (step Y513).

Next, after calculating a new random number by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step Y513 from the loaded random number (variation pattern random number 2 or variation pattern random number 3) (step Y514), the calculation It is determined whether the newly generated random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, if the new random number is not smaller than "0" (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and the subsequent process.

That is, in step Y513, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, in step Y515, the determined random number is used as a new random number and the distribution value is subtracted. , and a new random number value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

The above process is performed until it is determined at step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (step Y517), and the sorting process ends. do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the fluctuation start information setting process (steps Y247, Y267) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the special figure 1 The random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y551; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage area of the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step Y553).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y557). Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the additional value is calculated as the remaining time (less than 60000 ms) after excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the specified time (here, 60000 ms) is measured. It is designed to be

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y560; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the result is a loss or a small hit in the normal game state for the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

And if it is not the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. Also, if it is the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y561; Y), save 9 in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and move to step Y564.

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567), and if the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated. Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569 ), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y570), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, stores the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) in the first change display game. It constitutes a first decision means capable of making a decision before the start of . In addition, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 37, and the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the predetermined random number. and second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

As described above, the first starting winning port 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning port 37 launches to the other side of the game area 32. and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is greater than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, which is a low probability state, is a loss or a small hit, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, the fluctuation Information about time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a command indicating only long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is only necessary to simply perform a variable display, so there is no need to determine the performance in detail. The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the burden of control in the production control device 300 can be reduced.

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 131 shows the high probability variation count update process (steps Y257, Y268) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this high-probability fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y581), and if not (step Y581; N), the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process is terminated. Also, if the high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), the high probability fluctuation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability fluctuation count is 0 (step Y583).

If the high-probability fluctuation count is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high-probability state continues, the high-probability fluctuation count update process is terminated. If the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, if the high-probability state is terminated, a signal regarding the high-probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). In this case, the big win 2 signal is set to be OFF. Furthermore, the signal regarding the high probability state and the end of the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF.

Furthermore, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the pattern to start varying is set (step Y588), and the high-probability variation frequency update process is terminated.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high probability fluctuation number update process for managing the number of times of the high probability state is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. If it is a gaming machine that does not execute the other special figure variation display game while one special figure variation display game is running as in the past, the probability state will be changed by the end of the special figure variation display game of the predetermined number of times. If you change to the low probability state, there will be no problem. However, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is changed to a low probability at the end of the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times. If it is changed to the state, even the other special figure variation display game started during execution of the one special figure variation display game will be judged in a high probability state, and a high probability over a predetermined number of times. A game can be executed in this state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one of the special figure variation display games, which is the predetermined number of times, is executed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to be in a low probability state by the start of the other special figure fluctuation display game, here, immediately after finishing the processing at the start of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, which is the predetermined number of times It is possible to change to a low probability state.

In this way, since the high probability fluctuation count update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery was performed in the high probability state, the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game It is already in a low probability state during display. Therefore, if another process refers to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the processing may be performed assuming that the probability state is low, which may cause inconvenience. be. Therefore, a high probability final variation flag is set so that the special figure variation display game can be treated as a game being executed as a high probability state. In addition, the high probability final variation flag is information that can determine whether the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the high probability state is the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game. contains.

[Special figure 1 change process transition setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In this special figure 1 process shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). In addition, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 varying pattern number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 varying process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, the start of the variable display can be immediately recognized by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 change process transition setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In this special figure 2 fluctuation processing shift setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal regarding the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to ON. After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value ( For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). In addition, the initial value is set to the special figure 2 changing pattern number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is completed.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variable pattern number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, the start of the variable display can be immediately recognized by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, all the segments are started from the state of turning off, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any of the result modes, or if there is a segment that is not used in any of the result modes, the variable display will be started from at least that segment being lit. You can make it work. Also, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is lit every time. Also, the lighting mode when starting the variation in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be the same or may be different.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 134 shows the special figure 1 fluctuating process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, + 1 update the number of times the design fixed number of times output (step Y621), prepared by loading the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), production command setting process (Step Y623).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), and perform production command setting processing (step Y625). In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

After that, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y626). In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is the final variation of high probability, the high probability final variation flag of special figure 1 is set. If it is not the final variation of high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y626; Y), the display time for the high-probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. In addition, as the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variation display game set here, if it is not a high probability final variation, it is 600 ms in the case of a loss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit. display time is set. Also, in the case of a high-probability final change, the display time is set to 7000 ms regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If it is during special figure 2 display processing (step Y631; Y), it moves to step Y633. In addition, if the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y631; N), the number of output times of pattern determination is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), the command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y636 ). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y637), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning pattern command area (step Y640), and whether it is a special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y641). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642 ), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), perform the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
FIG. 135 shows the special figure 2 fluctuating process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuating process, first, +1 update the number of times the pattern is fixed and output (step Y651), prepare by loading the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and perform the effect command setting process. (Step Y653).

Next, prepare a decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), and perform production command setting processing (step Y655). After that, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y656). In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the final fluctuation of high probability, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 2 is set.

If it is not the final variation of high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y656; Y), the display time for the high-probability final change is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not a high probability final fluctuation, and regardless of the result if it is a high probability final fluctuation A display time of 7000 ms is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y659). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. Also, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result of the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. Moreover, when special figure 1 displaying process is not in progress (step Y661; N), +1 is updated to the number of output times of design determination (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), load and prepare the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and perform the effect command setting process (step Y666 ). After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the production command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning pattern command area (step Y670), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit is determined (step Y671). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672 ), the information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 136 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 1 game process number "2" related to special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y681), processing number in special figure 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation in Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 during fluctuation signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 fluctuation.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 137 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In this special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, special figure 2 game process number "2" related to special figure 2 displaying process is set (step Y691), processing number in special figure 2 game processing number area is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal related to the end of variation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step Y694 ), to end the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 fluctuation.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 138 shows the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set (step Y701), and the process number is placed in the special figure 1 game process number area is saved (step Y702).

Next, save the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, clear the special figure 1 big winning opening information area (step Y707), save the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and save the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709 ). Then, clear the special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y710), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design area (step Y711), and end the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 139 shows the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed. is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then the special figure 2 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52. The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y724).

Up to this point, it is the same as the process shift setting process 1 during the special figure 2 display described above, and the information for setting the deviation result is performed. First, the deviation stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning opening information area (step Y727), save the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and save the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729 ). Then, clear the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y730), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 2 stop design area (step Y731), and end the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

134 to 139 described above, when one special figure variation display game results in a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result. That is, based on the special result of the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result, and the special figure 2 variation display game is a special result. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of losing, and the second end control process is performed.

As described above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when performing the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution is controlled by the control means (game control device 100) results in a special result, the first variation display game whose execution is controlled can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means executes by the first variable display game execution control means when performing the execution control of the second variable display game. When the first variable display game being controlled results in a special result, it is possible to end the second variable display game under control as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forced to stop with a losing result, so that even when simultaneous variations are performed, no problems occur. can be

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 show the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752).

Next, the big-hit flag 1 set in the big-hit flag 1 area in the big-hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big-hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big win, that is, whether the loaded big win flag 1 is big win information (step Y755), and if it is not a big win (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. In addition, if it is a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON, the role continuous operation device is operated The medium signal is turned on, and the special symbol per 1-per-symbol signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y757), and perform the production command setting process (step Y758). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. Save in area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment, in step Y766, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variable D1, is turned ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variable D1 in the high probability state, and is turned ON in the low probability state. If it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big win 3 signal is turned ON when the kind of big win is a big win other than the 2R variable probability D1, turned OFF when it is the 2R variable probability D1 in the high probability state, and turned OFF in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

Thereafter, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000ms, 3000ms or 4ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit to open the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

If it is a big hit that opens the upper big winning hole (step Y769; Y), the upper big winning hole fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the outside of the fraud monitoring period flag is placed in the upper big winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area. is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. If the jackpot is not to open the upper big winning hole (step Y769; N), that is, if the big win is to open the lower big winning hole (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning hole illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y772), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the process during special figure 1 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determine (step Y778).

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y781), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the special figure 1 normal processing to be performed next time, and the notification to instruct the left-handed is performed.

After that, commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y787).

If the probability is not high (step Y787; N), the signal regarding the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display section 77 is turned off, and the left-hand hitting instruction is displayed.

On the other hand, if the probability is high (step Y787; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display section 77 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit to open the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792). Clear the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y793), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and proceed to step Y797. In addition, if it is not a small win that opens the upper big winning hole (step Y792; N), that is, if it is a small win that opens the lower big winning hole (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning hole illegal winning The number area is cleared (step Y795), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

Also, in step Y777, when it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery was performed in a high probability state It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y798).

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y801), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y802).

Next, it is determined whether it is in the second special game state based on the small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y803). If it is during the special figure 2 small hit (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed hitting is maintained. Also, if the small hit of special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y803; N), the signal related to the left-hand hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y805). After that, clear (information subtraction) during the special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y806), perform the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1 (step Y807), and end the special figure 1 displaying process .

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 142 and FIG. 143 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In addition, during this special figure 2 display process, the processing equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 during display process is performed with special figure 2 as the target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big win, that is, whether the loaded big win flag 2 is big win information (step Y815), and if it is not a big win (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. In addition, if it is a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON, the role continuous operation device is operated The medium signal is turned on, and the special pattern 2 winning signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step Y817), and perform the production command setting process (step Y818). That is, the abnormal fluctuation notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special game state. After that, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is obtained. Save to area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment, in step Y826, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variable D1, is turned ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variable D1 in the high probability state, and is turned ON in the low probability state. If it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big win 3 signal is turned ON when the kind of big win is a big win other than the 2R variable probability D1, turned OFF when it is the 2R variable probability D1 in the high probability state, and turned OFF in the low probability state. It is turned ON when it is D1.

Thereafter, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit to open the upper big winning hole (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

In the case of a jackpot that opens the upper special winning opening (step Y829; Y), the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is placed in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. If the jackpot is not to open the upper big winning hole (step Y829; N), that is, if the big win is to open the lower big winning hole (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning hole fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y832), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process shift setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the process during special figure 2 display ends.

On the other hand, in step Y815, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, when the big hit flag 2 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determine (step Y838).

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y841), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the special figure 1 normal processing to be performed next time, and the notification to instruct the left-handed is performed.

After that, commands are loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

If the probability is not high (step Y847; N), the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 77 is turned off, and the left-hand hitting instruction is displayed.

On the other hand, if the probability is high (step Y847; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display section 77 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit to open the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852), and if it is a small winning to open the upper big winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, if the small win does not open the upper big winning hole (step Y852; N), that is, if the small win opens the lower big winning hole (second special variable winning device 39), the lower big winning hole illegal winning The number area is cleared (step Y855), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

Also, in step Y837, when it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special figure in which the lottery was performed in a high probability state It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y861), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y862).

Next, it is determined whether it is in the second special game state based on the small hit of the special figure 1, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variation display game (step Y863). When it is during the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y863; Y), it moves to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed hitting is maintained. Also, if the special figure 1 small hit is not in progress (step Y863; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y865). After that, clear (information subtraction) during the special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (step Y866), perform the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1 (step Y867), and end the special figure 2 displaying process .

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. Second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game. form.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 144 describes the details of the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the processing during special figure 1 display and the processing during special figure 2 display described above. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big win (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF.

After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special game mode is executed. Save the special figure low probability flag in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command to be output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the high probability state Clear the high-probability variation count area for managing the number of games played (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final variation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the state of hitting to the right is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

After that, save the release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and clear the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (step Y883). In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process is terminated. That is, along with the occurrence of the big hit, to clear all the information on the special figure 2 abnormal variation.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 145 shows the process transition setting process (step Y797) during special figure 1 small hit fanfare in the process during special figure 1 display described above. In this special figure 1 small winning fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" for small winning fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small win fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and the signal regarding the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, save the small hit middle information in the special figure status information (step Y896), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and end the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process. do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process]
FIG. 146 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above special figure 2 display process. In this special-figure 2 small-hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first, "7" for the small-hit fanfare mid-process is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special-figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal regarding the start of the small win is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the big win 1 signal output in the big win or the small win is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special pattern 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, save the small hit middle information in the special figure status information (step Y906), save the small hit display pointer in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and end the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process. do.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
FIG. 147 shows the fanfare/interval process (steps Y111, Y142) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the information on opening the big winning opening and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the effect command setting processing is performed. (step Y953).

Next, the initial value of the process control pointer during the big win corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the initial value of the pointer is saved in the process control pointer area during the big win (step Y955). As the initial value of the process control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, it corresponds to the 5Rth of 16R variable probability F3 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 5). Also, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, 21, which is the end value of the jackpot operation, is set. Note that the initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of openings and closings in one round.

Then, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The open time set here is, for example, 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, or 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959 ), and saves the opening time of the big winning opening in the special-figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot with the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) opened (step Y963). It is possible to determine from the set big winning opening opening information whether or not the big winning opening is the upper big winning opening. If it is a big hit with the upper big winning opening open (step Y963; Y), the process transition setting process 1 during opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare/interval process ends. Also, if the big winning opening opening is not the big hit (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 during opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

[Process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening]
FIG. 148 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above. In this process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big winning opening, first, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open/close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening is counted. The large winning opening count number is cleared (step Y973), and the processing transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening ends.

[Process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening]
FIG. 149 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the big winning opening in the fanfare/interval process described above. In this process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening, first, a signal relating to the opening start of the lower big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open/close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The large winning opening count number is cleared (step Y983), and the processing transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is ended.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning mouth]
FIG. 150 shows the processing (steps Y112, Y143) during the opening of the special prize opening in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this big winning opening opening process, first, a big winning process control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big winning operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002).

If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; N), the jackpot operation shift setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the jackpot mid-process control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). , ends the process during the opening of the big winning opening. In this case, opening and closing is performed during one round, and the opening and closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area is compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command for the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. Also, if it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1008). I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening open information is set (step Y1009), and 5 for the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining ball processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011).

If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015).

After that, the OFF data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening ends. In addition, in step Y1016, OFF data is set for both the upper and lower large winning opening solenoids, and processing for closing both large winning openings is performed.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 151 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the process during the opening of the big winning opening. In this jackpot operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the jackpot middle process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

At step Y1021, if the value of the big hit process control pointer is an even number, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that a different wait time may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the OFF data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In addition, in step Y1023, OFF data is set for both the upper and lower large winning opening solenoids, and the process of closing both large winning openings is performed.

On the other hand, if the value of the big-hit process control pointer is an odd number at step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the process control pointer during the jackpot is 1 to 19, 200ms is set as the jackpot opening time, and when it is 21, 25000ms is set. Next, the upper large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, so in step Y1024 the ON data of the upper large winning opening solenoid is saved. are doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the lower prize winning opening (the second special variable prize winning device 39) may be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

After that, it is determined whether it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), end the jackpot operation transition setting process. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the jackpot operation transition setting process is terminated. By the above processing, it is possible to repeat the opening and closing of the big winning opening in one round.

[Large prize mouth residual ball processing]
FIG. 152 shows the big winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this big winning hole remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

Then, if the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of opening the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare/interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is defined as a period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, so the interval period is 2000 ms, and during this interval period, the display device 41 etc. Interval performance is executed.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), perform the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045), set the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 jackpot end processing or special figure 2 jackpot end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1050), the big winning hole remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the final round until the remaining ball processing time elapses and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time until the ending time elapses. For example, in the case of special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1, the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, so the ending period is 11000 ms. is executed.

[Jackpot end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 153 shows the big hit ending process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described big winning hole remaining ball process. In this jackpot end processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the end of opening the big winning hole is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1073). ), the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the information in the large winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 154 shows the special figure 1 jackpot ending process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, "0" is set as a processing number relating to the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y1101), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1102).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number with a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time-saving state is always present during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished here and are referred to as high probability numbers. After that, the right-handed number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the extinguished number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

Next, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112), Clear the special figure status area (step Y1113). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the initial value (here, 50 ) is saved (step Y1115). In addition, save the probability information command (high probability) in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1116), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing with the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from becoming executable.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 155 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game processing described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end processing is the same processing except that step Y1117 in the special figure 1 jackpot processing described above is not performed.

First, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (variation time shortening state of special symbols) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

Then, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number with a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time-saving state is always present during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished here and are referred to as high probability numbers. After that, the right-handed number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the extinguished number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132), Clear the special figure status area (step Y1133). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

After that, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the initial value (here, 50 ) is saved (step Y1135). In addition, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

By these special figure 1 jackpot processing and special figure 2 jackpot processing, a specific game state which is a high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times after the end of the first special game state. . That is, the game control device 100 is a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than that in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. form. In addition, the specific game state generating means increases the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result over a predetermined period of time as the specific game state, compared to the normal state.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the minor winning fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 156, in this minor winning fanfare processing, first, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1201).

In step Y1201, if the opening pattern is the small winning 1 (special figure 1 lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1), prepare a small winning open command for opening the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) (Step Y1202), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1203). Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1204), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, the lower large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Also, if the opening pattern is a small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening/closing pattern 2) at step Y1201, a small winning open command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) Preparations are made (step Y1209), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1210). Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1211), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2 is set to ON. Then, the lower large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

Also, if the opening pattern is the small winning 3 (special figure 2 upper big winning opening opening/closing pattern 6) at step Y1201, the small winning open command for opening the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) Preparations are made (step Y1216), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1218), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (here 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, the upper large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

In addition, when the opening pattern is the small winning 4 (special figure 2 upper big winning opening opening/closing pattern 7) at step Y1201, the small winning open command for opening the upper big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) Preparations are made (step Y1223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 is set as the processing number for small hit middle processing (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal regarding the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Then, the upper large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing the processing according to these types of small wins, the large winning hole count area for counting the number of winnings to the big winning holes is cleared (step Y1230), and the process during the small winning fanfare ends.

[Small hit middle processing]
FIG. 157 shows small hit middle processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small-hit process, first, a small-hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

In step Y1243, when the open pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 1), set 9 for small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1244), special figure 1 The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247), and the small End the winning process.

When the opening pattern is the small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower big winning opening opening/closing pattern 2) at step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1248), special figure 2 The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251), and the small End the winning process.

In step Y1243, if the opening pattern is small hit 3 or 4 (special figure 2 upper large winning opening opening/closing pattern 6 or 7), set 9 for small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1252). , the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255), and the small End the winning process.

In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, OFF data is set for both the upper and lower large winning opening solenoids, and processing for closing any of the large winning openings is performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 158 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing described above. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the processing number (step Y1272), and set the processing number to the special figure 1 game processing number area Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the processing number (step Y1275), and set the processing number to the special figure 2 game processing number area Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (here 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the big winning hole count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing ends.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 159 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for the special figure 1 normal process is set as the processing number (step Y1301), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1302).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1307), and if the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1309), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310 ), to end the special figure 1 small hit end processing. Again, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed with the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 160 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). After that, save the number of turning off in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), clear the special figure status area (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it determines whether it is in the high probability (step Y1338), and when it is in the high probability (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[Symbol variation control process]
FIG. 161 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 and setting the display data of the special figure. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is fluctuating (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the pattern display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the pattern to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the flashing control timer associated with the pattern to be controlled is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, time is up (step Y1405).

If the blink control timer value is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the flashing control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) is saved in the flashing control timer area of the controlled object (step Y1406). is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable pattern number area is acquired (step Y1408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the pattern variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not fluctuating (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure indicator to be controlled among the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 .

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 162 shows segment LED editing processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above. In this segment LED editing process, the memory display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50 displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed). Unit 60, a first game state display unit 77 for informing the player of which method of hitting is advantageous to the player between left-handed (normal hitting) and right-handed hitting, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game. Settings related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 78 for notification are performed.

In this segment LED editing process, first, set the special figure 1 reservation number table that defines the display mode in the storage display unit 54 (step X601), obtain the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number, segment Save to area (step X602). Next, a round display table that defines the display mode on the round display unit 60 is set (step X603), and display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the game state display table 1 defining the display mode in the probability display section 78 is set (step X605), the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 that defines the display mode in the first game state display section 77 is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), ending the segment LED editing process.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 163 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on. is detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the detection period of the abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed out. Determine (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected continuously for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (step X613). That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts).

On the other hand, if the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, if no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X619). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, if the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the fraud notification period has expired or the fraud notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, a command to end the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Furthermore, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), effect command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. do.

[Processing for monitoring radio wave fraud]
FIG. 164 shows the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121a, the board radio wave sensor 62 It is determined whether it is ON, that is, in a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). If the board radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (here, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a command for notifying the radio wave fraud is prepared (step X633), and a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step X634). A match is determined (step X639). That is, in the case of radio fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not ON (step X631; N), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer, which defines the radio wave fraud notification time, is updated by -1 if it is not 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio tampering alarm timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio irregularity notification timer is 0 (step X636).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the radio wave fraudulent notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, and the fraudulent notification period has expired or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If it has not been done, prepare a command for termination of radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a radio wave fraud cancel flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and prepare a radio wave fraud flag. It is determined whether it matches the value of the illegality flag area (step X639).

If the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 165 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step X105), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), board radio fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test device and setting it in an output buffer is performed.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame open error is occurring (step X701), and if the glass frame open error is not occurring (step X701; ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame open error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is saved as external information. Save in the output data area (step X704) and proceed to step X707.

On the other hand, if a glass frame open error is occurring (step X701; Y) or if a body frame (front frame 12) open error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door/frame open signal The ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X707). ). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to zero.

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Transition. As a result, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), it means that the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects an abnormal radio wave. is determined (step X709).

If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

And magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), big winning mouth fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y ), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719) and move to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. Also, if no error occurs in any of steps X713 to X716, the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

Then, the starting port 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning port 36 and the starting port 2 signal editing processing (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning port 37 are performed. conduct. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information about the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (step X723) to end the external information editing process.

[Start port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 166 shows the starting port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the external information editing process described above. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). If the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

If the starting port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the starting port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the starting port 1 signal output control timer region is output. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the starter 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the starter signal. (for example, 192 ms). After that, ON data for turning on the starter 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starter 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output is 0 (step X733; Y), the OFF data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), ending the start port 1 signal editing process.

On the other hand, if the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736). Note that the fact that the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the starter 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the starter 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (step X838) to end the starting port 1 signal editing process. Note that the starting point 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above performs the same process as the starting point 1 signal editing process for the starting point 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 167 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the external information editing process described above. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). processing.

In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The initial value of this main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) in the ON state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level). time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. Also, if the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X748), ending the main prize ball signal editing process.

On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746). It should be noted that the fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. Also, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (step X748), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Signal determination number signal editing process]
FIG. 168 shows the pattern determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the external information editing process described above. The number-of-symbols-fixed signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

In this design decision count signal editing process, first, if the pattern decision count signal output control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X751). Note that the minimum value of the pattern determination count signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern determination count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the pattern confirmation frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the pattern confirmation frequency signal output frequency, which is updated by +1 each time the special figure variation display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

Then, if the number of output of the number of pattern determination signal is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of output of the number of symbol determination number signal is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the pattern determination number signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). The initial value of the design decision count signal output control timer is obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time (here, 256 ms) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (here, 300 ms) of the pattern decision count signal. time (here, 556 ms). In addition, since the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed simultaneously in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ON state time is set to 256 ms and the OFF state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, ON data for turning on the number of pattern determination signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the design number of times signal editing process is terminated. In addition, when the number of pattern determination signal output times is 0 (step X753; Y), the OFF data for turning off the pattern determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X753; Y). X758), the symbol fix count signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the number of design decision signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether or not the number of design decision signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756). It should be noted that the design determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the design determination number signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more. If the pattern determination count signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. In addition, when the pattern confirmation number signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the pattern confirmation number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (step X748), and ends the pattern determination number signal editing process.

Next, the presentation of the game will be described. FIG. 169 shows a display example on the display device 41 . These display controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on control information received from the game control device 100 .

FIG. 169(a) shows an example of display on the display device 41 during a game in the normal game state. A game mode display section 80 for displaying the game state is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. Here, "normal stage" is displayed, which means that the game is in a normal game state. Also, a decoration special figure 1 variation display game display section 81 for displaying a decoration special figure 1 variation display game is provided in the center of the display area. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping after displaying the identification information in the left, middle and right variable display areas.

A decoration special figure 2 variation display game display section 82 for displaying a decoration special figure 2 variation display game is provided in the lower right part of the display area. Here, ○ and - are used as identification information, and these are displayed alternately in the variable display, and then ○ in the case of a special result, and - in the case of an error, is displayed by stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display View games.

A memory display section 83 for displaying a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The ornamental starting memory display displayed here corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed side by side in the order of memory, indicating that there are four first starting memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is the decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and moves to the left each time it is consumed. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

At the lower center of the display area and to the left of the memory display section 83, there is provided a running memory display section 84 that displays information about the starting memory corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game currently being run. At the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the decorative start memory display at the left end of the memory display part 83 is transferred to the in-execution memory display unit 84, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. is suggested by its display mode.

FIG. 169(b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in the specific game state. In the upper left part of the display area, a number-of-games information display section 85 is provided to indicate the number of games played in the specific game state. "LAST" indicates the number of remaining games that can be executed in a specific game state, and "TOTAL" indicates the number of games that have been executed in a series of specific game states.

The numerical value displayed on the number-of-games information display unit 85 may not necessarily match the actual number of games, but the actual number of games is managed inside the effect control device 300. Based on this, the display contents of the number-of-games information display section 85 are set. The performance control device 300 manages information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state each time a decorative special figure variation display game is executed, and the display content of the number of games information display section 85 is this information. is set based on

On the right side of the number-of-games information display section 85, a game mode display section 80 for displaying the game state is provided. Here, "Pounding RUSH" is displayed to indicate that the game is in the normal game state. On the right side of the game mode display section 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 is provided to inform the player that right-handed is advantageous to the player. On the right side of the right hitting instruction display 86, a memory display section 83 and a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81 are provided. Here, the first starting memory number is displayed by a number. In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game display section 81 and the storage display section 83 may not be displayed in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not executed.

Below the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display section 81, an acquisition number display section 87 is provided to indicate the number of winning balls acquired in a series of specific game states. In this winning number display section 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1 pt, which indicates that 1234 prize balls have been obtained. Also, in the center of the display area, the number of winning balls is displayed based on the winning to the special variable winning device, and is added to the winning number display portion 87 .

In this acquisition number display part 87, from the start of the special game state that triggered the start of the specific game state to the end of a series of specific game states, that is, the special game state based on the first special result that occurred in the low probability state The number of prize balls acquired during the period from the start of the game to the low probability state by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times without deriving the first special result during the specific game state is displayed. It is designed to be added at any time every time a prize ball is won during this period. The number of prize balls obtained in the special game state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls obtained in the special game state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them may be displayed. You can do it. Also, only the number of prize balls based on the winning to the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the second special variable prize winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first start prize winning port 36, the second start prize winning port 37, The number of winning balls based on the winning to the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

A decoration special figure 2 variation display game display section 82 for displaying a decoration special figure 2 variation display game is provided in the lower right part of the display area. The display position of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is the same as in the normal game state. In addition, in the central lower part of the display area, there is provided an effect symbol display section 88 for displaying effect symbols corresponding to the special figure variation display game. The performance symbols are variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas and then stop-displayed to perform performance corresponding to the special figure variable display game. It should be noted that the variation and stop of the performance symbols do not necessarily correspond to the variation and stop of the special figure variation display game. The performance symbols can be executed at the same time, and the execution state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which one becomes a special result and the other is forcibly stopped due to a losing result is played. It is intended to make it easier for people to understand.

That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a receiving means capable of receiving control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, the decoration variation display game (decoration special figure 1 variable display game and decorative special figure 2 variable display game). In addition, the effect control device 300, in the specific game state, the decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is executed. Subtracting means for subtracting the number of executions of the variable display game from a predetermined number of times each time the game is played. In addition, the production control device 300, in the specific game state, variably displays and stops displaying a plurality of production identification information without corresponding to the execution of the decoration variation display game, corresponding to the subtraction number of the subtracting means. It constitutes performance identification information variable display means that can be executed by Also, the effect control device 300 serves as game number information reporting means capable of reporting game number information, which is information corresponding to the result of subtraction by the subtraction means.

FIG. 170 shows the execution of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game, and the change in the display of the effect symbol and the number of games information display unit 85, and FIG. 171 shows the display on the display device 41. rice field. In the ending period (t31) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 170, as shown in FIG. Displays the remaining number of games (50) that can be executed in the state.

Here, at the end of the first special game state, there are three first start memories, and as shown in FIG. A 1-variation display game is also started (t32). Furthermore, with the end of the first special game state, the game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game is also started (t32). . That is, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed at the same time. In addition, although it is shown here to be started at the same time, in fact, after the end of the special game state, the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed first, so the special figure 1 variation display game After the is started, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started.

This special figure 2 variation display game ends (t35) before the scheduled ending timing (t37) of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the result is a small hit. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game ends, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped as a result of losing (t35).

Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only by the decoration special figure 1 variation display game, the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. It may be difficult for a player accustomed to playing the game to grasp the progress of the game. Therefore, by using performance symbols for displaying the progress of the game by means of a display similar to that of a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game, the number-of-games information display section 85 is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance symbols. makes it easy to grasp the progress of the game.

First, with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the variable display of the performance symbols is started in the performance symbol display unit 88 . Along with this, the number-of-games information display unit 85 sets the number of remaining games (LAST) to 49 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) to 1 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal game state, the first special game state is executed, and the specific game state is started after the end of the first special game state. is one game. When the special game state occurs in the specific game state, the specific game state continues, so the number of games executed before the start of the special game state is incremented by one.

As shown in FIG. 171(b), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started after that, the variable display of the performance symbols is maintained as it is, and the display contents of the number-of-games information display section 85 do not change. In the drawing, ◯ and - are displayed at the same time to show the variable display, but in reality, the variable display is performed by alternately displaying ◯ and -. Since the special figure 1 variation display game will be forcibly stopped by this special figure 2 variation display game, the setting of the display contents of the production pattern will be changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. becomes.

As shown in FIG. 170, by this change, the design for effect which is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped before the end of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 171(c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a loss. At this time, only the design for production is stopped, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game remain variablely displayed.

In addition, the stop symbols of the performance symbols at this time are not only the stop symbols indicating the failure, but also suggest or notify that special results will be derived at the next stop such as "NEXT" or "attention". Also good. In addition, as a variation pattern of the decoration special figure variation display game, a re-variation display in which the variation display is started again after temporarily stopping in the decoration special figure variation display game in the middle of the special figure variation display game in a result mode other than the special result mode is performed. When a so-called pseudo-continuous variation display mode that is performed one or more times can be executed, the effect at the time of stopping or resuming the performance symbols may be the same as the temporary stop or re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous variation display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170, the variable display of the performance symbols is started again (t34). At this time, the display of the number-of-games information display section 85 is updated, the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 48, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 171(d)). Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are stopped, the variation display of the performance symbols is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 171(e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game also stop the fluctuation display and display the result mode.

By changing the setting of the display mode of the performance symbols in this way, the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed in the same display mode as the conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game. That is, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (t32), the effect symbols are continuously variably displayed until the special figure 1 variation display game is scheduled to be stopped (t37), and then stopped to perform one special figure variation display. Although it was planned to show that the game was played, the setting of the display contents of the design for effect is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game after that (t32). In this change, it is changed to stop (t33) once before the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, start the fluctuation again (t34), and stop (t35) at the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game there is In other words, the effect symbols are stopped according to the subtraction number (here, 2) in the subtraction means from the start to the stop of the special figure variation display game that triggered the start of the variation of the effect symbols. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170, the second special game state is started and the first special variable winning device 38 is released. As shown in 99 ( f ), in the special game state, the number of winning balls is displayed and added to the winning number display section 87 as the special variable winning device wins. After that, when the second special game state ends, the special figure variation display game becomes executable (t38). During t38-t39 and t39-t40, the game progresses in the same manner as t32-t38 described above.

Also, when there is no first start memory and only the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, the variation and stop of the design for production are the same as the variation and stop of the special figure 2 variation display game (t40 to t41). . In addition, even when only the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, the effect symbols are varied and stopped at the same time as the special figure 1 variation display game is varied and stopped.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are executed at the same time, if the special figure 1 variation display game ends first, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is If it is lost, the design for production is stopped along with the stop of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the variable display is performed again. Also, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a special result, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped due to the loss result, so the effect pattern is stopped before the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped. And perform the variable display again, and stop with the stop of the special figure 1 variable display game.

From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the decoration variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) corresponding to the first variable display game or the second variable display game in the specific game state. Subtracting means (production control device 300) for subtracting the number of executions of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time it is played, and in the specific game state, a plurality of production identification information (production a performance identification information variable display means (performance control device 300) capable of variably displaying and stop-displaying the symbol for performance in accordance with the subtraction number of the subtracting means, wherein the performance identification information variable display is provided. The means, in the specific game state, when the decorative variable display game ends in response to execution of the first end control process in the first variable display game based on the special result of the second variable display game. Then, the number of variable displays and stop displays corresponding to the first variable display game and the second variable display game are performed until the end, and the player is notified that the subtraction by the subtracting means has been performed for each variable display game. It is possible to notify.

In addition, the effect identification information variable display means is configured to cause the decorative variable display game to start in response to the execution of the first end control process in the first variable display game based on the special result of the second variable display game. When the game ends, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the first variable display game are performed before the end, the variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed after that, and the second variable display is performed at the time of the end. A stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

Next, the control for the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 172, in a state in which the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed at the same time, as shown in FIG. If you do, as shown in FIG. 172 (c), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game stops with a special result first, so the effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted and the result is forced will be stopped. In order to avoid such a state, the production control device 300, when receiving a command notifying that the special figure 1 variable display game is longer from the game control device 100, produces a highly expected production. I try not to.

[Production lottery process]
FIG. 173 shows the effect lottery process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the variation pattern of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the variation pattern received from the game control device 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern allows execution of the highly anticipated effect, the premium effect (step Z12). . If the variation pattern does not allow the execution of the premium effect (step Z12; N), effect lottery processing is performed (step Z15), and the effect lottery processing is terminated. In the effect lottery process, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected according to the variation pattern received from the game control device 100.例文帳に追加

Moreover, when it is a variation pattern in which the premium effect can be executed (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer is received (step Z13). When the command notifying that the variation time of special figure 1 is longer is received (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In this case, since there is a possibility that the situation shown in FIG. 172 may occur, the specific pattern is selected instead of the premium effect. Note that the specific pattern will be described later.

Further, when the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is not received (step Z13; N), premium effect lottery processing is performed (step Z14), and normal effect lottery processing (step Z15). to end the effect lottery process. In the premium performance lottery process, whether or not to execute a premium performance (special performance) and the type thereof are determined by lottery. When it is determined to execute the premium performance, the type is determined, and the determined premium performance becomes the variation pattern of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal effect lottery process is not performed. Further, when it is decided not to execute the premium effect, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premium effect lottery process, whether or not the lottery for the premium effect is performed, and if the lottery is performed, the probability of winning the premium effect may be changed depending on whether the result is a special result or not.

FIG. 174 shows an example in which the specific pattern is not set because the special figure 1 variation display game ends earlier than the special figure 2 variation display game. As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 174(b). In this case, a premium effect can be set, and in this example, the premium effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 174(c) and (d).

Here, since the special figure 1 variation display game is a special result (here, a big hit), the special figure 2 variation display game is lost as the special figure 1 variation display game ends as shown in FIG. Forced to stop as a result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is lost, the special figure 2 variation display game is not forcibly stopped.

FIG. 175 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 175(a), when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 175(b). The special figure 2 variation display game being executed ends earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game, and results in a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the loss result, a specific pattern is set.

This specific pattern is a variation pattern that is a predetermined variation time (for example, 12 seconds) during which the reach state does not occur. If the special figure 2 variation display game does not end even after this variation time elapses, the temporary stop state in which the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is displayed so as to shake with the result as shown in FIG. 175 (c) Become. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game ends before this variation time elapses, the identification pattern of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is stopped at that time.

When the special figure 1 variation display game ends with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game, the identification pattern of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game stops as shown in FIG. 175(d). After this, the second special game state is entered, and after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory as shown in FIG. 175(e).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 175 (b), the period in which the identification pattern is displayed fluctuating at high speed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set to the time before a predetermined time from the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game, and always The state of FIG. 175(c) may be passed through.

Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are executed at the same time, the specific pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variation display game ends first and the first special result is obtained. You can do it. FIG. 176 shows a display example in this case. 176(a) to (c) are the same as FIG. 174. FIG. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 variation display game, the decoration special figure 1 variation display game stops in the result mode of the first special result as shown in FIG. 176 (d) and the special figure 2 variation display game ends , the first special game state. By enabling such an effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the specific pattern.

In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be selected as a result of the game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game stops first due to the result of the loss, a specific pattern such as that shown in FIG. 176 is set. Is possible. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a losing result, the premium lottery process (step Z14) may be executable even when the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped first.

Also, in the above-described effect lottery process for determining the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, the premium effect lottery The process (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a special result in the normal game state than the longest fluctuation time set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the first special result in the normal game state It is preferable to set the shortest variation time to be longer. By doing this, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variation display game in which the premium effect is set, the special figure 1 variation display game stops first, so the problem is not does not occur.

It should be noted that, based on the derivation of a special result in one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result, other than the above can be considered. For example, as described in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 116, if the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254; ), in conjunction with the processing (step Y255) to prepare a command to notify that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, or instead of this processing, the processing of resetting the fluctuation pattern may be performed. .

In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 changes to a variation pattern in which the premium effect cannot be selected, it is determined in the process of FIG. It is determined and the selection of the premium effect is not performed. In addition, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, it is possible to change the variation pattern so as to select the specific pattern so that the specific pattern is always selected. In addition, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may be left unchanged or may be changed.

In addition, when determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246), instead of changing the variation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You can do it.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game can be selected as a result, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result A process (step Y254) for determining whether or not it is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game of FIG. 2 is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss, this process is unnecessary because the special figure 1 variation display game is not forcibly stopped due to the result of the loss.

In addition, as another example of dealing with the case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game, for example, special figure 1 In the normal game state in which the variation display game is mainly performed, the special figure 1 variation display game may be treated as superior, and the processing may be advanced so that the special figure 1 variation display game progresses advantageously.

When performing such processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 116, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( In step Y254; N), in place of the processing of steps Y225 and Y226, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a special result, and if the result is a special result, the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game The time is changed to be less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the special result that should have been derived in the special figure 1 variable display game from being changed to a losing result.

Also, even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost and the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time, if the number of first start memories is large, special features based on these A short variation time may be set so that the FIG. 1 variation display game ends before the special figure 2 variation display game ends.

Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, even if a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is not so disadvantageous, but in a specific game state where the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 2 variable display The game may be treated as an advantage. For example, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the first special result while the 1 variation display game becomes the special result, and if the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the first special result, the special figure 2 variation A process of changing the display game variation time to be less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be performed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first special result that should have been derived in the special figure 2 variable display game from being changed to a losing result. In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game results in the first special result, the variation time is adjusted so that either one is more advantageous than the first special result of the special figure 2 variation display game. You can do it.

From the above, the first determination means (game control device 100), when determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) in the normal state (normal game state), the second It is possible to determine the variation mode of the first variation display game by referring to whether or not the variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is being executed and/or the variation mode information of the second variation display game. It should be possible.

In addition, the variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information about variation time capable of specifying the execution time of the variation display game, and the first determining means determines the normal state (normal game state), when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game, if the second variation display game is being executed, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game It is possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game by referring to time.

In addition, the variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information about variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and information about the variation pattern corresponding to the variation time. The first determination means, when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal state (normal game state), without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game First variation mode determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining variation mode information of the first variation display game, and variation time of the first variation display game by the first variation mode determination means If the second variation display game is being executed when the variation mode information is determined, the determined first variation display refers to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. A second variation mode determination means (game control device 100) capable of re-determining information on variation patterns without changing the variation time of the game is provided.

Further, the second variation mode determining means does not redetermine the information regarding the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed does not result in a special result.

Also, the ornamental variation display game execution control means (effect control device 300) corresponds to the first variation display game when the state of the second variation display game at the start of the first variation display game satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decoration variable display game executed by

Further, when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game and the result of the second variation display game is lost, the decoration variation display game execution control means controls the first variation display game. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a special effect in the decoration variable display game executed corresponding to the variable display game.

In the above embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game does not generate the second start memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in the same way as the special figure 1 variation display game The second starting memories may be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number (eg, 4). In addition, a normal variable prize winning device capable of changing the state of the second starting prize winning port 37 between a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can win a prize more easily than in the closed state or in which a prize can be won. may be provided. In the specific game state in which the game is progressed mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, control may be performed so that the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device per unit time is substantially longer than in the normal game state. .

[First modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the number-of-games information display section 85 and the display mode of the effect symbols are different.

As described above, if the progress of the game is displayed only by the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed at the same time. It may be difficult for a player accustomed to the game machine to grasp the progress of the game. Therefore, in this modification, at least during the period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory, clear information is not displayed on the number-of-games information display section 85. I have to.

FIG. 177 shows execution of the special figure variation display game and changes in the display of the number-of-games information display section 85, and FIGS. In the ending period (t61) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 177, as shown in FIG. 178(a), it is notified that the specific game state is started. In this example, there are three first starting memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. A 1-variation display game is started (t62). In addition, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the variable display of the design for production are also started.

Furthermore, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t63). In addition, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed at the same time. It should be noted that the pattern for effect that started the variable display with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game changes while continuing the variable display as shown in FIG. 178 (b) even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started I don't.

As shown in FIG. 177, this special figure 2 variation display game ends earlier than the special figure 1 variation display game, resulting in a second special result (minor hit). Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in the result mode corresponding to the result of each game, and the design for production is the second special result It stops with the result mode corresponding to .

In the game so far, the special figure fluctuation display game is executed twice, but the design for effect starts at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and stops at the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Therefore, it appears to the player that one special figure variation display game, which is the second special result, has been played. By doing so, it is possible to convey the progress and contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner to players accustomed to conventional gaming machines that do not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game.

In addition, when the first special game state ends, the number-of-games information display unit 58 starts to display (t62). It becomes the preparation mode display which does not perform. In the period when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are likely to be executed at the same time, if the information of the actual number of games is displayed, the change becomes complicated, and the player cannot understand or distrust. The information on the number of games is not clearly displayed here because there is a risk that the player may get a sense of it. This preparation mode display is continued at least until the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state is finished, and here, the first start memory does not exist until the special game state ends (t67).

After that, as shown in FIG. 177, after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variation display game based on the second first start memory is started (t65). As with the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory, this special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the second special result. , the second special game state (t65 to t66). The same is true for the third first start memory (t66 to t67).

The contents of the display on the display device 41 during these periods t65 to t66 and t66 to t67 are the same as those displayed during t62 to t65, as shown in FIGS. 178(d) and (e). The information display unit 85 displays "preparing", the design for effect starts at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and stops in the result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177, when the special game state ends in the state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), after that, only the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is mainly executed, and the timing of consuming the number of games is Since it is the same as the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time, the RUSH display mode for displaying the information on the number of games on the number-of-games information display section 85 starts from here.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 179( a ), “RUSH start” is displayed to indicate that the RUSH display mode has been entered, and the number of remaining games is displayed on the number-of-games information display section 85 . However, the number of remaining games is displayed which is less than the actual number of remaining games. Here, 40 is displayed although the actual number of remaining games is 43.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177, the number of remaining games in the number-of-games information display section 85 is subtracted each time the special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 179(c)). After that, as shown in FIG. 179(d), a display instructing to operate the effect button 25 is displayed at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction, the effect display in which the dragon spits fire on the game number information display section 85 is performed as shown in FIG. 179(e), and as shown in FIG. An additional performance is provided in which the value of the number-of-games information display section 85 is added so that the actual remaining number of games is obtained.

The actual number of remaining games may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). In addition, although the actual number of remaining games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25, the value of the number of games information display section 85 becomes less than the actual number of remaining games based on the operation of the effect button 25. A value may be added.

Also, in the display on the game number information display section 85 at the start of the RUSH mode, it is preferable that the number of games to be decreased from the actual number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (here, 4) of the first starting memory. . If the second starting memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the special figure 2 variable display game, the sum of the upper limit number of the first starting memory and the upper limit number of the second starting memory (for example, 8) It is preferable to set it as above.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed in the RUSH display mode, the effect symbols are displayed once in the same manner as t62 to t65, and the number of games information display section The subtraction of the number of remaining games at 85 may also be set to 1 to make it easier for the player to understand. By setting the number of remaining games displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode to be smaller than the actual number of remaining games, it is possible to subtract 1 from the number of remaining games in such a case. However, if the currently displayed number of remaining games matches the actual number of remaining games, the number of remaining games is subtracted by 2, or the preparation mode is displayed again and the RUSH display mode is displayed after a predetermined period of time. It is preferable to have a transition so that there is no contradiction.

From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is the game number information reporting means (effect control device 300 ), and the number-of-games information announcing means notifies the number-of-games information at least until the end of the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state. There will be no

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modified example performs the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process at different interrupt timings.

In the game machine of this modified example, instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 88, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 180 is performed. In this timer interrupt process, the big winning opening switch monitoring process that has been performed in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt process (step X801).

In addition, in the branch processing by the special figure processing counter (step X802), if the value of the special figure processing counter is an even number, special figure 1 game processing is performed (step X110), and if it is an odd number, special figure 2 game processing (step X111 )I do. Note that 0 is treated as an even number. After that, the special figure processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

The special figure processing counter may be sequentially updated in the range of 0 to 255, may be alternately updated 0 and 1, and may be updated in the range of an even number of values. In addition, since the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processes are performed at twice the time (here 8ms) of the timer interrupt process time (here 4ms) It will be done. Therefore, this should be considered when setting the timer value updated by these processes.

181 and 182 show special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing in this modification. In these processes, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132 that were performed in the processes of FIGS. 109 and 110 are not performed.

FIG. 183 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process in this modified example. This big winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 111 except that the process of determining the winning state of the special figure (step Y1501) is performed. In the process of determining the special figure hit situation (step Y1501), it is determined whether the special result derived from the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game is processed, and according to the determination result Set the target special figure. In addition, if it is not necessary to distinguish which special figure to process, it is not necessary to perform the process (step Y1501) for determining the hit situation of the special figure.

From the above, it is possible to execute an interrupt routine that is started at a predetermined period, and the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed by the first variable display game control means (game control device 100). Even if there is, the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) can be executed by the second variation display game control means (game control device 100), and the second variation display game control means can perform the second The first variable display game can be executed by the first variable display game control means even when the variable display game is being executed, and the first variable display game control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game. and a series of execution controls for the second variable display game by the second variable display game control means are not executed simultaneously within one interrupt routine. As a result, the processing time can be shortened even when simultaneous variation is performed.

[Third modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIGS. Based on the special figure 2 abnormal winning number counted based on the winning a prize, the same determination as the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is performed.

FIG. 184 shows an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is updated by +1 based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 in the normal game state (t101, t102). Then, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches 5, which is the specified value, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and external information and game machine error indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on this flag The output of the status signal to the device outside the game machine is started, and the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation can be grasped by the management device of the game parlor or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of this command, it is notified that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, sound, or the like.

In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches the specified value of 5, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer starts timing (t102), and after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has passed ( t103), the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 terminates the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. If a new prize is won in the second starting prize opening 37 before the predetermined time elapses, the timing of the predetermined time is newly started from that point.

Figures 185 and 186 show an example of counting the number of special figure 2 abnormal winnings. As shown in FIG. 185, the monitoring state is set to be valid or invalid, and if there is a prize to the second start winning port 37 when the monitoring state is valid, special figure 2 abnormal winning The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

This monitoring state is basically valid when it is in a low probability state. However, if there is a prize in the second start prize-winning port 37 while the monitoring state is valid (t113, t116), a predetermined invalid set period (here, 10 seconds) from the prize is invalidated (t113 ~ t115, t116 ~ t117), the winning (t114) to the second start winning opening 37 that occurred during this invalid set period (t113 ~ t115) is not counted as the number of abnormal winnings. Also, it is invalid during the first special game state. Also, the second special game state in the low probability state is effective because it is a short period.

Then, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not newly added over a predetermined clear period (t117 to t118, here 1800 seconds) from the end of the above invalid setting period, It is designed to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special game state is started.

FIG. 186 shows the counting of the number of special figure 2 abnormal winnings at the end of the specific game state. Since the monitoring state is invalid when it is in the high probability state, even if there is a prize to the second start prize winning port 37, the special figure 2 abnormal prize winning number is not added. Then, for the last special figure variation display game in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to a low probability state at the start of the special figure variation display game (t123), but the special figure variation display game It remains in an invalid state until the end (t124).

Here, since it becomes effective from the end of the last special figure variation display game started in a high probability state, if the result of the special figure variation display game is the second special result, the second special game It becomes valid state from the start of the state (t124). In this second special game state, right-handed hitting is performed following the specific game state, so winning to the second start winning opening 37 occurs and the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is added (t125). However, the second special game state ends in a short time, and since the invalid setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t125 to t127), the second special game state In the subsequent winning to the second starting winning port 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added (t126). Therefore, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number added by the second special game state remains at 1, and after that, it is cleared when the clear period (t127 to t128) elapses, so there is no problem.

In order to enable such processing, in the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing of FIG. Perform processing to update +1 the special figure 2 abnormal winning number based on. Then, in the processing of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number.

In addition, the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number that will perform the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification, and the length of the clear period can be set arbitrarily. The specified value and the length of the period to be set here may be any value as long as it is a value that allows the player not to aim at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Also, even when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed, the payout of prize balls for winning is performed as usual.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are executed at the same time, the other special result is derived in one special figure variation display game. The figure variation display game is interrupted, and the interrupted special figure variation display game is resumed after the special game state is ended.

FIG. 187 shows the collective display device 50 in the gaming machine of this modified example. D1 to D18 are the same as in FIG. D19 and D20 are interruption display portions 79 indicating whether or not the special figure variation display game is to be interrupted. As shown in FIG. 187(b), the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. Shows either the state, the state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted.

FIG. 188 shows an example in which the special figure variation display game is interrupted, and FIGS. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 188, while neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, the variation display game b, which is the special figure 2 variation display game, starts. (t151), and thereafter, a variable display game a, which is a special figure 1 variable display game, is started (t152).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 189(a), the variable display is performed on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52. In addition, all of the interruption display portions 79 are turned off. Also, on the display device 41, the variable display of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 188, the first special result is derived as a result of the variable display game a earlier than the variable display game b, and ends (t153). (t154). Based on the derivation of this first special result, the variable display game b is interrupted (t153). During interruption, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. Further, during the interruption, the interruption display section 79 displays that the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted.

As shown in FIG. 189(b), in the state where the variable display game a derives the first special result and stops, the special result mode corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special figure 1 indicator 51. becomes. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 remains to perform the variable display. Furthermore, D20 lights up in the interruption display section 79, indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted. In addition, on the display device 41, the decoration special figure 1 variation display game stops in a special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game continues to perform the variation display. In addition, as shown in Figure 189 (c), Figure 190 (a), even in the special game state special figure 1 indicator 51, special figure 2 indicator 52 and interruption display section 79, the special figure shown in Figure 189 (b) The display mode is the same as when deriving the result.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188, when the first special game state ends, the interrupted variable display game b is resumed, and measurement of the variable time is resumed (t155). Then, the variable display game b ends when the remaining variable time elapses (t157). After the end of the first special game state, a new variation display game c is started in the special figure 1 variation display game. This variable display game c stops before the variable display game b (t156), but since the result is a loss, the variable display game b continues without interruption.

As shown in FIGS. 189(b) and (c), with the end of the special game state, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 perform variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is restarted, all the lights are turned off to indicate that the game is not interrupted.

Thus, by interrupting the other special figure variation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game, and restarting the interrupted special figure variation display game after the special game state ends , It is possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special figure variation display game. In addition, while the special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted, an interruption signal may be output as external information, and information for determining which of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is being interrupted is also output. can be

In order to perform the processing related to the interruption of such a special figure variation display game, instead of the special figure 1 varying processing illustrated in FIG. 134, the special figure 1 varying processing illustrated in FIG. 191 is performed. In this special figure 1 fluctuation processing, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game stop processing of steps Y631 to Y639 is not performed, and the special figure 2 interrupting flag is saved (step Y1511).

Moreover, instead of the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 135, the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 192 is performed. In this special figure 2 fluctuation processing, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game stop processing of steps Y661 to Y669 is not performed, and the special figure 1 interrupting flag is saved (step Y1512).

Moreover, instead of the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 111, the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 193 is performed. In this special figure 1 game process, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513), and if there is no special figure 1 suspended flag (step Y1513; N), that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the interruption has not been performed, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game after step Y103 is performed. On the other hand, if there is a special figure 1 interrupted flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed , the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

Moreover, instead of the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 112, the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 194 is performed. In this special figure 2 game processing, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1514), and if there is no special figure 2 suspended flag (step Y1514; N), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game If the interruption has not been performed, the processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game after step Y133 is performed. On the other hand, if there is a special figure 2 interrupted flag (step Y1514; Y), that is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed , the process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, while the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

Moreover, instead of the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 154, the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 195 is performed. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, the process (step Y1515) of clearing the special figure 2 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special game state is resumed.

Moreover, instead of the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 155, the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 196 is performed. In this special figure 2 jackpot end processing, processing (step Y1517) for clearing the special figure 1 interrupted flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special game state is resumed.

Moreover, instead of the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 159, the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 197 is performed. In this special figure 1 small hitting end processing, the processing (step Y1518) of clearing the special figure 2 suspending flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special game state is resumed.

Moreover, instead of the special figure 2 small hitting end process shown in FIG. 160, the special figure 2 small hitting end process shown in FIG. 198 is performed. In this special figure 2 small hitting end processing, the processing (step Y1519) of clearing the special figure 1 interrupting flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special game state is resumed.

In addition, in the special game state that is performed while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, it is possible to perform an advance notice effect regarding the result or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game that is being suspended. In addition, when there is a first start memory, a look-ahead effect for the first start memory may be performed during the special game state.

FIG. 199 shows an example of a pattern using different control methods depending on the situation regarding how to control the other special figure variation display game based on the special results derived in one special figure variation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method for forcibly stopping the other special figure variation display game with a losing result based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. In addition, the control method 2 is a control method of interrupting the other special figure variation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game and restarting it after the special game state ends.

Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 199(a) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the special figure type. In this pattern, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state is finished (control method 2 ).

In particular, when a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (control method 1), so that the game can be played when the high probability state is started. It is possible to make the game proceed in an advantageous manner for the player. That is, if the control method 2 is used in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game with a long variation time started in the low probability state at the start of the high probability state will be resumed, so a new special figure 2 variation display The game will not be able to start easily. In the high-probability state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shortened, and the special result is frequently generated, so that the player can win a large amount of prize balls, so control method 1 is used. By doing so, the start of a new special figure 2 variable display game is hastened, and the game progresses advantageously for the player.

Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 199(b) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (jackpot) is derived in one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (control method 1). . On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one of the special figure fluctuation display games, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control Method 2). It should be noted that the control method may be selected in consideration of the special figure type.

Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 199(c) is a pattern in which the control method is set according to the winning type. For example, when the big hit pattern 1A or the small hit pattern 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit pattern 1B or the small hit pattern 1b is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state is finished (control method 2 ). Note that the control method may be set simply depending on whether the first special result or the second special result is selected.

Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 199(d) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the game state and the special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped with a losing result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted and restarted after the special game state ends (control method 2). Also, in the specific game state (during ST), control method 2 is used regardless of the type of special figure or the type of special result.

In this example, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result in the normal game state so as to be disadvantageous to the player, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. I'm trying In addition, for the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main subject in the normal game state, the special result is not changed to a loss due to the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is an advantageous state for the player, the forced stop of any special figure fluctuation display game is prevented from changing the special result to a loss, and the player can maximize the profit. is obtained. In addition, considering the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is not the main subject in the specific game state, is forced to stop, preventing the player from gaining excessive profits. good too. Also, the control method may be set only according to the game state. For example, only the control method 1 may be used in the normal game state, and only the control method 2 may be used in the specific game state.

Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 199(e) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the game state, special figure type, and special result type. In the normal game state, the special result of one of the special figure variation display games is not changed to a losing result by deriving the second special result of the other special figure variation display game. In addition, in the specific game state, the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to a losing result by deriving the first special result in one special figure variation display game, and the first We try to increase the value of special results.

Note that the control method patterns are not limited to those listed here, and other patterns may be used. In addition, although the special figure type, the type of the special result, the game state, and the like are listed as the parameters for selecting the control method, the parameters are not limited to these, and other parameters may be taken into consideration. Other parameters include the number of games played after the end of the special game state, date, day of the week, calendar information such as the current time, achievement of certain conditions in the game such as generating a predetermined number of hits.

When selecting the control method as shown in FIG. 199, in the special figure 1 fluctuation process shown in FIG. 191, if special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), A process for selecting either suspension or termination is performed. And, when the interruption is selected, the processing which saves the special figure 2 interruption flag is done (step Y1511), the processing after step Y640 is done. In addition, when the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 134 is performed, and the process after step Y640 is performed.

Also, in the special figure 2 fluctuation process shown in FIG. 192, if the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the process of selecting whether to interrupt or end according to the conditions to And, when the interruption is selected, the processing of saving the special figure 1 interruption flag is performed (step Y1512), and the processing after step Y670 is performed. In addition, when the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 135 is performed, and the process after step Y670 is performed.

That is, the game control device 100 performs end control to end one variable display game as a result other than a special result, and after interrupting one variable display game and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game, and a restart control for restarting one of the interrupted variable display games.

From the above, it can be concluded that either one of the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) causes the variation of one of the variation display game execution control means. When the display game (special figure variation display game) is under execution control, if the other variation display game whose execution is controlled by the other variation display game execution control means results in a special result, one end control for ending the variable display game as a result other than the special result; Resume control for resuming , and selection means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing either based on a predetermined condition.

Further, the selection means controls execution by the second variation display game execution control means when execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is being performed by the first variation display game execution control means. When the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in which is being performed results in a special result, the first variable display game is interrupted and after the special game state based on the second variable display game is completed restart control for resuming the interrupted first variation display game is selected and executed, and when the second variation display game execution control means is performing execution control of the second variation display game, the first variation display is performed. When the first variable display game under execution control by the game execution control means results in a special result, end control for ending the second variable display game as a result other than the special result is selected and executed. I did it.

Further, the selecting means selects and executes end control for ending the one variation display game as a result other than the special result when the other variation display game results in the first special result, and executes the other variation display game. is a second special result, the one variable display game is interrupted, and after the special game state based on the other variable display game is completed, the one variable display game that has been suspended is restarted. is selected and executed.

In addition, in the case of the specific gaming state, the selection means controls execution by the first variation display game execution control means when the second variation display game execution control means is performing execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game in which is being performed results in a special result, the second variation display game is interrupted and the second variation that has been suspended after the special game state based on the first variation display game is completed. This means that the restart control for restarting the display game is selected and executed.

Further, the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the second variation display game includes information about variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and the first variation display game and the second variation display game. measurement means (game control device 100 ), wherein the first variable display game execution control means and the second variable display game execution control means end the variable display of the variable display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variable time. When the selection means selects the restart control, the measuring means interrupts the measurement of the variation time of one of the variation display games based on the fact that the other variation display game results in a special result, and the other variation display game. After the end of the special game state based on the first variation display game, the measurement of the variation time of the one variation display game, which has been interrupted, is resumed.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the display method and configuration of the collective display device 50 are different.

In Figure 200, the display method at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 was shown. As shown in FIG. 200(a), when starting the variation display of the next special figure variation display game from the state where the result mode of the previous special figure variation display game or the result mode of the special result is displayed, all lights are turned off to start from the state of In this way, it is immediately recognizable that the fluctuation has started. It should be noted that while all lights out and the missing symbols are repeated during fluctuation, all lights out and symbols that are not used as a result mode may be repeated as shown in FIG. 200(b). It is possible to immediately know that the fluctuation has started, regardless of where it starts. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be different in the pattern to be lit first at the start of the deviation pattern, the fluctuation display, the pattern to be displayed during the fluctuation display, and the like.

FIG. 201 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50 . As shown in FIG. 201(a), in this batch display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged linearly. In addition to this, LED q ~ t functioning as a memory display unit 54 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game, a round display unit 60, a first game state display unit 77 and a probability display unit 78 LED u ~x are provided. Note that other functions may be assigned.

As shown in FIG. 201(b), in the special figure 1 indicator 51, LEDa and b are turned on to form a missing pattern, and during the variable display, this missing pattern and all lights are repeated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 201(c), in the special figure 2 indicator 52, only the LEDi is turned on to form a missing pattern, and during the variable display, this missing pattern and all lights are repeated. Thus, the design of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the design of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are different.

In addition, the display mode during the variable display of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 configured in this way may be a display mode other than those described above, for example, one or more LED blinking or alternating It is also possible to alternately turn on and off the adjacent LEDs so that the light flows along the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end by repeating the lighting, the missing pattern, and the full lighting. Further, as shown in FIG. 202, the number of LEDs may be different between the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52. In this case, you may make it control so that the time when light flows from LED of one end to LED of the other end may become the same also with which special-figure indicator. That is, the special figure 2 indicator 52, which has more LEDs than the special figure 1 indicator 51, may speed up the flow of light. Of course, the light may flow at the same speed. In addition, it is also possible to vary the missing symbols and the varying symbols.

In addition, when the number of LEDs is different between the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, it becomes possible to set more result modes for the special figure with the larger number. That is, when there are multiple patterns of small hits due to different opening modes as in the present embodiment, the game ball is entered into the special figure 2 start winning port 37 by hitting to the right to the extent that it is not determined to be illegal in the normal state, It is highly conceivable that a fraudulent act of aiming at the first special variable winning device 38 is performed when the LED of the special figure 2 display 52 is seen after a predetermined variable time has elapsed and the result mode corresponds to long opening. On the other hand, for example, if the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 display device 52 is increased, more small hit result modes can be set, and the player can easily recognize the result mode of long opening. and prevent the fraudulent activities described above.

FIG. 203 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. The collective display device 50 has LEDs a to y and z1 to z4. A covering member 95 made of a seal or a plate material is attached to the front surface of the collective display device 50 so as to cover the front surface. The covering member 95 is transparent at LEDa to y portions, which are used during the game, so that the presence of the LEDs can be seen at a glance. In addition, it is sufficient that the presence of the LEDs can be recognized at a glance.

Further, on the covering member 95, a display indicating the function of the LED is provided adjacent to the necessary portion of the portion where the presence of the LED can be seen at a glance. Positions adjacent to ~x indicate the number of rounds to be notified when each is lit.

The LEDs z1 to z4 that are not used during the game are hidden by the covering member 95 so that the presence of the LEDs cannot be seen at first glance. These LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as a function of the gaming machine. However, if there is a problem due to the presence of unused LEDs, they may be used, for example, as LEDs for notifying RAM initialization. The presence of the light is made translucent so that it cannot be seen and the lighting state can be confirmed.

By using the collective display device 50 and the covering member 95, by setting the function of each LED and the configuration of the covering member 95 according to the model, the collective display device 50 can be used in common even for different models. can be used.

FIG. 204 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the collective display device 50 . As shown in Figure 204 (a), the arrangement of the LEDs of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are different.

In the case of such a configuration, even if the number of the LED to be lit for the result mode and the changing pattern is common to the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the display is a different shape symbol can do. For example, FIG. 204(a) shows a state in which both the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are displayed with different symbols. In this missing pattern, the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in any special figure display device, but since the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the display has a different shape. Thus, even if common pattern data is used for the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, it is possible to display a different shape pattern, and the common data is used to express various patterns. be able to.

FIG. 204(b) shows the display during fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51. FIG. In the display during fluctuation, all light-off and predetermined LED light-on are repeated. Here, before the occurrence of the reach (during the first half fluctuation), all lights out and the LEDs 6 and 7 are repeatedly turned on, and during the N reach, all lights out and the LEDs 2 and 5 are repeatedly turned on. Further, during SP1 reach, all lights out and LEDs 1 and 3 light up are repeated, and all lights out and LEDs 4 and 8 light up are repeated during SP2 reach. In this way, by changing the lighting position according to the variation pattern, it is possible to perform various effects.

In addition, for example, when it becomes SP1 reach, it may be a display mode that repeats lighting of all lights out and LEDs 1 and 3 from before the occurrence of reach, and announcing the occurrence of reach in the special figure indicator. Further, a lighting mode for suggesting or deterministically informing the occurrence of a big hit may be provided as the lighting mode during variation, and the occurrence of the big win may be suggested or reported on the special figure display.

FIG. 205 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the collective display device 50 . As shown in FIG. 205(a), the special figure 1 indicator 51 is composed of LEDs arranged in an annular shape, and is displayed so that the light circulates during the variable display. The result mode is displayed by turning on one or more LEDs. Of course, the special figure 2 indicator 52 has the same configuration. In addition, the special figure indicator may form some kind of design, for example, the shape of a mushroom is formed in the example shown in FIG. 205(b).

[Sixth modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the contents of the game are different.

As shown in FIG. 206, in this modification, there are four game states of low probability mode M1, high probability mode M2, high probability mode M3 and low probability mode M4. These game states are transitioned. Here, the low probability in the name of each game state means a low probability state, and the high probability means a high probability state. In addition, the disadvantage is a special figure 1 variation display game that is disadvantageous to the player because the special figure 2 variation display game has a long variation (about 10 minutes) with a very long variation time, so the probability of occurrence of a small hit is low. This means that the game is progressing mainly with In addition, "advantageous" means that the special figure 2 variation display game is not set to a long variation and the probability of occurrence of a small hit is high and the game is advanced mainly in the special figure 2 variation display game which is advantageous for the player. .

The low probability/disadvantage mode M1 is a game state corresponding to a normal game state, and the high probability mode M3 is a game state corresponding to a specific game state. Further, the high probability/disadvantage mode M2 is a so-called latent state, and is an effect state in which the player cannot clearly distinguish between the low probability/disadvantage mode M1 and the high probability/disadvantage mode M2. This effect state is also set when winning 2R normal or a small hit in the low odds-and-disadvantage mode M1. The low probability mode M4 is similar to the time-saving state in conventional gaming machines. In this game state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game, so the player can wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of held balls due to the high frequency occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the types of hits in special figures 1 and 2 are as shown in FIG. 206, respectively. Of these, the probability variable jackpot is a jackpot with a high probability until 50 times of special variable display games are executed after the end of the special game state, and the normal jackpot is a jackpot with a low probability after the special game state is finished. is.

It should be noted that the number of winning balls obtained by small hits and the variation time may be adjusted so that the number of held balls tends to increase in the low probability mode M4. Since this low-probability mode M4 continues until the next big win, it can be continued for a long period of time, and during this period, the number of held balls can be gradually increased, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time in a special game state. It can be a game different from . In addition, a special figure 1 variable display game, which is a normal jackpot in a low probability mode M4, is started with a configuration in which it is possible to win in both the first start prize opening 36 and the second start prize opening 37 in the right hand shot. In that case, a special result may be generated in the special figure 2 variation display game to prevent the normal big hit in the special figure 1 variation display game, and a notification may be made to encourage the maintenance of the low probability mode M4.

Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of game states, the effect control device 300 sets an effect according to the game state. However, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it becomes impossible to carry out an appropriate production. In order to minimize inconvenience caused by such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information about the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

The game control device 100 sends the probability information command shown in FIG. 207(a) including the information of the game state to the effect control device 300 when the game state is switched, at the start of the special game state and at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Send. As shown in FIG. 207(b), at the start of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is low probability (t171), the command of A801h, which is a probability information command indicating low probability is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, at the start of the special game state (t172) generated when the odds are low, a command of A801h, which is a probability information command indicating the odds are low, is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Since the result here is a variable probability big hit, the game state shifts to a high probability advantage by the end of the special game state. In connection with this, the command of A802h which is a probability information command which shows that it is highly probable is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 (t173). Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 performs a highly probable effect.

Then, at the start of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is highly probable (t174, t175), a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly probable, is sent to the effect control device 300. Send. After that, the power supply of the effect control device 300 is cut off for some reason (t176), and the display on the display device 41 is not performed (black display). During this time, the game is progressing in the game control device 100, but the display device 41 does not perform the decoration special figure variation display game or the like.

After that, when the power of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays a restoration image on the display device 41 until receiving any command from the game control device 100 (t177-t178). When a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that the special figure variation display game is started, is received from the game control device 100, the decorative special figure variation display game is started with a high probability effect. (t178). By doing so, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state.

Also, the game control device 100 executes the customer waiting command shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a certain customer waiting is set. As shown in FIG. 208(b), the power supply of the production control device 300 is cut off for some reason here (t181), and then the power supply of the production control device 300 is restored and the production control device 300 is activated ( t182).

If the special figure fluctuation display game is started after restoration of the effect control device 300, the probability information command including the information of the game state is transmitted as described above, so that the effect corresponding to the game state can be restored. Neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and customer waiting setting is made (t184).

The game control device 100 transmits a command of 8002h, which is a customer waiting command indicating that it is highly probable when setting the customer waiting, and the effect control device 300, based on the information of this customer waiting command, is highly probable. Set the production and wait for customers. By doing so, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. In particular, it is possible to apply the screen shot function and the setting function of the customer waiting demonstration effect. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device (effect display device)
300 effect control device (control means, input receiving means, effect image storage means, effect image display means, display image selection means, enlarged display means)
700 production operation unit (operation means)

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a game execution condition, and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In a game machine equipped with
Provided with a production control means for controlling the production based on the command from the game control means,
The game includes a first game that is executed based on the establishment of a first game execution condition and a second game that is executed based on the establishment of a second game execution condition,
The special results include a first special result capable of generating a first special game state and a second special game state capable of generating a second special game state having a lower game value than the first special game state. with special results,
The game control means is
Simultaneous execution means capable of simultaneously executing the first game and the second game;
a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state,
The concurrent execution means
forcibly stopping the second game with a result other than the special result based on the fact that the first game is stopped with the first special result during execution of the second game;
forcibly stopping the first game with a result other than the special result based on the second game stopping with the first special result during execution of the first game;
The first game is interrupted based on the second game stopping with the second special result during execution of the first game , and after the second special game state based on the second special result ends, restarting the first game, and at the end of the variable time of the first game, stopping the first game with the outcome determined at the start of the first game;
During the suspension of the first game, the measurement of the variable time of the first game is suspended, and the variable display of the identification information of the first game is continued;
determining, in the normal game state, a variation mode including the variation time of the first game without referring to variation mode information including the variation time of the second game;
The production control means is
Regarding the type of effect executed in the first game in the normal game state , the variation mode of the first game, whether or not the second game as the first special result is being executed , and the first game and the remaining variable time of the second game at the start of the game machine.

Images